Masterdrives Manual Retificador (Ing) PDF

s
Betriebsanleitung
SIMOVERT Master Drives Operating Instructions
Einspeise-Einheit
Bauform H und K
Common Rectifier
Sizes H and K
Ausgabe / Edition: F Bestell-Nr. / Order-No.: 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

General 06.01
These Operating Instructions are available in the following languages:
Language French Spanish Italian

Order No.: 6SE7087-7AK85-0AA0 6SE7087-8AK85-0AA0 6SE7087-2AK85-0AA0
Converter software version:

At the time these operating instructions was printed, the infeed and regenerative feedback units were supplied
from the factory with software version 4.5.
These operating instructions basically also apply to other software versions.
Older software versions: It is possible that some parameters might not exist (i.e. that the function they apply to
does not exist) or that some parameters might have a restricted setting range.
However, this is generally marked in the parameter list where it applies.
Newer software versions: It is possible that additional parameters might exist on the common rectifier units (i.e.
that there are also additional functions that are not described in these operating
instructions) or that some parameters might have an extended setting range. Leave
such parameters in their factory setting and on no account set any values that are not
described in these operating instructions!
You can order the latest software version (EPROM) under MLFB No.: 6SW1701-0DA14.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or contents is

not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable
for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or
registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
We have checked that the contents of this publication agree with the
hardware and software described herein. Nonetheless, differences
might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely
identical. The information given in this publication is reviewed at regular
intervals and any corrections that might be necessary are made in the
subsequent printings. Suggestions for improvement are welcome at all
times. SIMOVERT ® is a registered trademark of Siemens
© Siemens AG 1994 All rights reserved

06.01 Contents
ENGLISH
Contents
Page
0 Definitions .................................................................................................................. 0-9
1 Description ................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Application ....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Principle of operation ....................................................................................................... 1-1
2 Transport, Unpacking and Assembly ............................................................. 2-1

2.1 Transport, unpacking ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Storage ............................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.3 Assembly ......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.4 Dimension drawings ........................................................................................................ 2-3
3 Connection ................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Power connections .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 Short-circuit withstand capability ..................................................................................... 3-6
3.2 Power supply and main contactor .................................................................................... 3-7
3.3 Control terminal block and serial interface ...................................................................... 3-8
3.3.1 Connectors for the control terminal block ........................................................................ 3-8
3.3.2 Connecting the control leads ........................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.3 Terminals and setting elements on the CUR (A10) module ............................................ 3-9
3.3.4 Connecting-up the parameterizing unit (PMU) ................................................................ 3-11
3.4 Measures for keeping to RFI suppression regulations .................................................... 3-12
3.5 Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements ............................................. 3-13
3.6 Power sections ................................................................................................................ 3-15
3.7 Parallel connection of parallel unit(s), size K ................................................................... 3-18
3.7.1 Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement for parallel connection ............. 3-21
3.8 12-pulse mode (only possible with the optional RS485 interface) ................................... 3-22
3.8.1 General information on 12-pulse mode, application ........................................................ 3-22
3.8.2 Hardware requirements, configuration of the power sections ......................................... 3-23
3.8.3 Parameterization for 12-pulse mode ............................................................................... 3-24
3.8.4 Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599) and control word 2, bit 23 ....................... 3-26
3.8.5 Start-up with 12-pulse mode ............................................................................................ 3-27
3.8.6 Redundancy mode ........................................................................................................... 3-29
3.8.7 RS485 interface cable for the Peer-to-Peer link on SST2 ............................................... 3-30
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 ENGLISH 0-3

Common Rectifier Operating Instructions
Contents 06.01
Page
4 Start-Up ........................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Introduction and handling start-up ................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Handling the start-up instructions .................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 General explanation of the terminology and functional scope of the common rectifier ... 4-1
4.2 Initial start-up ................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.1 Preparatory measures ..................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 Parameterization "Standard application“ ......................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Parameterization for "Expert application“ ........................................................................ 4-7
4.2.5 Simple application examples for connecting process data with connection assignment . 4-9
4.3 Start-up aids .................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.1 Process data .................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.1.1 Control word (control word 1 and control word 2) ............................................................ 4-10
4.3.1.1.1 Introduction and application example .............................................................................. 4-10
4.3.1.1.2 Overview of the control word (control word 1 and control word 2) ................................... 4-12
4.3.1.1.3 Selecting the source for control word 1 (bits 0-7) ............................................................ 4-13
4.3.1.1.4 Selecting the source for control word 1 (bits 8-15) .......................................................... 4-14
4.3.1.1.5 Selecting the source for control word 2 (bits 16-23) ........................................................ 4-15
4.3.1.1.6 Selecting the source for control word 2 (bits 24-31) ........................................................ 4-16
4.3.1.1.7 Significance of control word- (1 and 2) commands ......................................................... 4-17
4.3.1.2 Status word (status word 1 and status word 2) ................................................................ 4-22
4.3.1.2.1 Introduction and application example .............................................................................. 4-22
4.3.1.2.2 Overview of the status word (status word 1 and status word 2) ...................................... 4-23
4.3.1.2.3 Selecting the destinations for the status word (bits 0 - 31) .............................................. 4-24
4.3.1.2.4 Significance of the status word messages ...................................................................... 4-25
4.3.1.3 Setpoints .......................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.3.1.4 Actual values ................................................................................................................... 4-28
4.3.2 Binary inputs .................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.3.3 Binary outputs .................................................................................................................. 4-29
4.3.5 Analog output ................................................................................................................... 4-30
4.3.6 Serial interfaces ............................................................................................................... 4-33
4.3.6.1.1 Basic converter interface SST1 ....................................................................................... 4-33
4.3.6.1.2 Basic converter interface SST2 (A2-X117), see Section 9.6, Options ............................ 4-33
4.3.6.2 Dual-port RAM (DPR for SCB, CB, TB) ........................................................................... 4-33
4.3.9 Function selection (P052) ................................................................................................ 4-34
4.3.9.1 Generating the factory setting (P052 = 1 or P970 = 0) ................................................. 4-34
4.3.9.2 Initialization (MLFB setting) (P052 = 2) ......................................................................... 4-36
4.3.9.3 Download or upread (P052 = 3) .................................................................................... 4-37
4.3.9.4 Hardware configuration (P052 = 4) ............................................................................... 4-38
4.3.9.5 Drive setting (P052 = 5) ................................................................................................ 4-39
4.3.9.6 Form DC link (P052 = 20) ............................................................................................. 4-40
0-4 ENGLISH Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

06.01 Contents
Page
4.3.9.7 Circuit identification (P052 = 21) ................................................................................... 4-41

4.3.9.8 Display modified parameters (P052 = 22) .................................................................... 4-43
4.3.10 Functions ......................................................................................................................... 4-43
4.3.10.1 WEA (automatic restart) ................................................................................................. 4-43
4.3.10.2 Externally requested and current-dependent Ud reduction ............................................. 4-45
4.4 Function diagrams ........................................................................................................... 4-46
4.5 Starting up optional supplementary boards ..................................................................... 4-51
4.5.1 Procedure for starting up technology boards (T100, T300, T400) .................................. 4-51
4.5.2 Sequence of operations for starting up PROFIBUS boards (CBP2) ............................... 4-52
4.5.2.1 Mechanisms for processing parameters via the PROFIBUS .......................................... 4-54
4.5.2.2 Diagnostic tools ............................................................................................................... 4-55
4.5.3 Sequence of operations for starting up CAN bus boards (CBC) ..................................... 4-59
4.5.3.1 Description of CBC with CAN Layer 2 ............................................................................. 4-60
4.5.4 Sequence of operations for starting up the serial I/O board SCB1 .................................. 4-67
4.5.4.1 SCB1 as master for SCI1 and SCI2 ................................................................................. 4-68
4.5.4.2 SCB1 as peer-to-peer interface........................................................................................ 4-69
4.5.5 Sequence of operations for starting up the board SCB2 ................................................. 4-70
4.5.6 Structure of request/response telegrams ........................................................................ 4-71
5 Parameter List .......................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Operation display ............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2 General observation parameters ..................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 General parameters ......................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4 Drive data ........................................................................................................................ 5-8
5.5 Hardware configuration ................................................................................................... 5-10
5.6 Data of the DC link .......................................................................................................... 5-11
5.7 Control ............................................................................................................................. 5-12
5.8 Convenience functions .................................................................................................... 5-15
5.9 Setpoint channel .............................................................................................................. 5-17
5.10 Control and status word ................................................................................................... 5-18
5.11 Analog input/output .......................................................................................................... 5-27
5.12 Communications .............................................................................................................. 5-29
5.13 Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................... 5-34
5.14 Modulator ......................................................................................................................... 5-36
5.15 Factory parameters ......................................................................................................... 5-37
5.16 Profile parameters ........................................................................................................... 5-38

Contents 06.01
Page
6 Operator Control ...................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Operator control elements ............................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Displays 8.8.8.8. ............................................................................................................ 6-2
6.3 Structure .......................................................................................................................... 6-3
7 Fault and Alarm Messages .................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 Fault messages ............................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Alarm messages .............................................................................................................. 7-9
8 Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 8-1

8-1 Maintenance recommendations ...................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Replacing components .................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.1 Replacing the fan ............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2 Replacing modules .......................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.3 Power interface module spare parts ................................................................................ 8-6
8.2.4 Replacing thyristor blocks ................................................................................................ 8-8
8.2.4.1 Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size H .................................................................. 8-8
8.2.4.2 Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size K .................................................................. 8-9
9 Options ........................................................................................................................ 9-1

9.1 Options which can be integrated into the electronics box ................................................ 9-1
9.2 Interface boards ............................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3 Power Supply ................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.4 Operator control panel OP1S .......................................................................................... 9-4
9.5 RS485 interface (PTP1) ................................................................................................... 9-5
9.5.1 Order designation ............................................................................................................ 9-6
9.5.2 Assembly ......................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.5.3 Function and terminal description .................................................................................... 9-6
9.5.4 Parameterization .............................................................................................................. 9-7
9.6 SIMOVIS .......................................................................................................................... 9-7
10 Spare Parts ................................................................................................................ 10-1
11 Blank
12 Logbook ...................................................................................................................... 12-1
13 Environmental Compatibility .............................................................................. 13-1

06.01 Contents
Page
14 Technical Data .......................................................................................................... 14-1

14-1 Power reduction at increased coolant temperature ......................................................... 14-5
14.2 Power reduction at altitudes > 1000m above MSL .......................................................... 14-5
14.3 Applied standards ............................................................................................................ 14-6

Contents 06.01

06.01 Definitions
0 Definitions
• QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of this Instruction Manual and product labels, a "Qualified person" is someone
who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards
involved. He or she must have the following qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and
equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established
safety procedures.
3. Trained in rendering first aid.
• ς DANGER
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
• ς WARNING
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
• ς CAUTION
used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderata injury.
• CAUTION
used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in property demage.
• NOTICE
NOTICE used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially situation which, if not
avoided, may result in an undesireable result or state.
NOTE
For reasons of clarity, these operating instructions do not contain all details of all types of the product and can
also not take into account every conceivable installation, operation or maintenance circumstances.
You can consult your local Siemens branch if you should require further information or if particular problem
occur that are not dealt with in adequate detail in the operating instructions.
Attention is also drawn to the fact that the contents of this instruction manual shall not become part of or
modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or legal relationship. The sales contract, which also
contains the complete and solely valid warranty stipulations, contains the entire obligations of Siemens. These
contractual warranty stipulations are neither extended nor limited by the statements given in instructions and
documentation.

Definitions 06.01
CAUTION
Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESDs)
The equipment contains electrostatically sensitive devices. These components may be destroyed very easily
by improper handling. Please observe the following notes if you nevertheless have to work with electronic
modules:
♦ Electronic modules should only be touched if absolutely necessary to carry out work on them.
♦ If modules nevertheless have to be touched, you must discharge your own body directly beforehand (this is
best done by touching an earthed conductive object such as the PE contact of a socket).
♦ Modules must not come into contact with highly insulating materials − e.g. plastic films, insulating desktops
or synthetic fibber clothing items.
♦ Modules must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
♦ When soldering modules, the tip of the soldering iron must be earthed.
♦ Modules and components must only be stored or dispatched in conductive packaging (e.g. metallized
plastic boxes or metal tins).
♦ If packagings are not conductive, modules must be placed in a conductive envelopment prior to packaging.
In this case, use can be made of conductive foam rubber or domestic aluminum foil, for example.
The necessary protective measures for ESDs are elucidated once again in the following figure:
a = conductive floor d = ESD coat
b = ESD desk e = ESD armband
c = ESD shoes f = earthing terminal on cabinets
d d d
b b
e e
f f f f f
c a c
a a
Sitting position Standing position Standing / Sitting position
WARNING
When operating electrical equipment, certain parts of such equipment are inevitably live.
Owing to the dc link capacitors, hazardous voltages are present on the equipment up to
5 min. after deenergization (power terminal and electronic power supply). This is why it is
not permitted to open the housing until after waiting for 5 minutes.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury or
considerable property damage.
Such personnel must be thoroughly acquainted with all warnings and maintenance
activities.
Perfect and safe operation of the equipment requires proper transport, expert storage,
installation and assembly and cautious operation and maintenance.

06.01 Definitions

Definitions 06.01

06.01 Description
1 Description
1.1 Application
The SIMOVERT Master Drive power supply units type 6SE70 are power electronic units of compact design.
They function as a DC power supply unit for the SIMOVERT Master Drive inverter series type 6SE70. The power
supply unit generates a DC voltage of fixed amplitude (depending on the mode of operation and the voltage
tolerance) from a three-phase AC power supply system.
One or more inverters and braking DC choppers can be connected to the output of the unit. The sum of the
rated currents of the installed inverters may not exceed the rated current of the power supply unit. On planning
the installation it must be ensured that the sum of the instantaneous load compensation currents at no time
exceeds the rated current of the power supply unit. Feedback of energy to the power supply system is not
possible.
The output current can be increased by connecting power sections of size K in parallel. Up to 2 parallel units of
the same rated current can be connected in parallel with one basic unit (see Section 3.7 for further details on
parallel connection)
You can make technological adaptations and expansions over a defined interface in the control section.
Harmonic loading on the supply network can be reduced by coupling 2 units for "12-pulse mode" (for further
details on "12-pulse mode", see Section 3.8).
1.2 Principle of operation

The power section of the power supply unit comprises a six-pulse thyristor bridge for controlled rectification of
the three-phase AC power supply. Control of the link circuit voltage is effected by means of a digital controller
module with microprocessor.
A 24V external supply is required for operating the units (see Sections 3.5 and 9.3).
The common rectifier is suitable for connecting several inverters to a common DC bus. This permits the
exchange of energy between motoring and generating drives, and thus saves energy.
Once the DC link capacitors have been precharged, the inverters are ready for operation.
Start-up of the rectifier unit is carried out via an operator panel on the electronics box. Operation is performed via
the terminal strip or via a serial interface
Optional interfaces and intelligent I/O modules are available in conjunction with programmable controllers and
other automation equipment for controlling the common rectifiers.

Description 06.01

06.01 Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
2 Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
2.1 Transport and unpacking

The units are packed at the manufacturing works. A product packaging label is attached to the box.
Avoid extreme vibrations and hard impacts during transport, e.g. when lowering the unit.
Pay attention to the notes on the packaging relating to transport, storage and proper handling.
The converter can be installed after unpacking it and checking the consignment for completeness and
damage.
The units are bolted onto pallets with fixing pieces in their usual operating position and packed with
cardboard.
The packaging may be disposed of in accordance with local cardboard disposal regulations.
You should notify your freight forwarder immediately if you discover any transportation damage.
2.2 Storage
The units must be stored in clean dry rooms. Temperatures between −25 °C (−13 °F) and + 70 °C (158 °F) are
permissible. Temperature fluctuations > 20 K per hour are not permissible.
2.3 Assembly
The following are required for securing size H:
♦ four M8 bolts
♦ four M8 bolts
The following are required for securing size K:

♦ six M8 bolts
♦ dimension drawing (Figure 2.3 for size K)
WARNING
For safe operation of the unit, it is presumed it will be assembled and commissioned by
qualified personnel, paying attention to the warning notes given in these operating
instructions.
Particular note must be taken both of the general and national erection and safety
regulations regarding work on power installations (e.g. VDE) and regulations regarding the
proper use of tools and of personal protective equipment.
The unit must be protected against the ingress of foreign matter as otherwise proper
functioning and safety will not be guaranteed.

Transport, Unpacking and Assembly 06.01
Requirements for the installation site:

Local guidelines and standards must be observed in relation to assembly.
Operating facilities must be dry and dust-free. Air fed in must not Dissipate power
contain any gases, vapors or dusts that are electrically conductive or
detrimental to functioning. Air containing dust must be filtered.
WARNING
Dimension cabinet ventilation according to the
dissipated power! (Technical data in Chapter 14)
The unit’s ambient climate in operating rooms must not exceed the
values of code 3K3 as detailed in DIN IEC 721 Part 3-3 /04.90. A
reduction of power as detailed in Chapters 14.1 and 14.2 is 6SE70
necessary in the event of temperatures > 40 °C (104 °F) and
altitudes >1000m. The terminal voltage has to be reduced for
altitudes > 2000m.
Carry out assembly in accordance with the dimension drawings in Cooling air
Section 2.4. ≤ 40 °C (50°C)
Figure 2.1 Installation in control cabinets
WARNING
In the case of units, all plastic covers must be mounted to ensure correct air flow and
cooling for the units.

2.4
06.01
Front view
Mounting holes for wall mounting 508 285

with M8 bolts 376 225
234 40 26 155
119
92 40 7) 130 Exhaust air
7) 26 7)
61 63 85
C/L+ D/L- D/L- C/L+ 1) Mounting hole for M12 screw
67
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Figure 2.2 Dimension drawing, size H
2) 2) M12 thread

26
250
252
3) Screen connection for cables
40
U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3 2) 4) Connector for 24 V DC power supply
W1 V1 U1
Dimension drawings
PE1 and main contactor

L3 L2 L1
50
50
5) Fan connection
T1
PE1 T2 6) Remove transport plates before start-up
F11 F14 F13 F16 F15 F12
7) For cabinet installation:
1) Insulate this part of the unit against the
cabinet walls and door
950
1050
Level B Level A When the units are installed in cabinets,it must

X19 X29
F4 be ensured that the air intake and exhaust is
PMU F3
adequate (for air requirements and intake air
X300
temperature, see Section 14 "Technical Data").
A10
Options A23 No displacement of the centre of gravity
1)
X27
Weight: refer to Section 14 (Technical Data)
PE2
F5 F1 F2
3) Dimension: mm
X9
PE2
X19 5)
X19
45
X9 4) 40 50 X9
ENGLISH
119 270
70 6) 424
551
Air intake
2-3
Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
2-4
Front view
40
400 665
Mounting holes for wall mounting
340 555 2)
40 with M8 bolts
270 420
200 310
40
130 175 Exhaust air
40 26 26 26 26
85 50
ENGLISH
1)
Transport, Unpacking and Assembly
U1 V1 W1 C D 1) Mounting hole for M12 screw
26
87
Figure 2.3 Dimension drawing, size K

PE1 PE1
L1 L2 L3 L+ L-
50 62
6b) 2) M12 thread
26
PMU U1/L1 C/L+ V1/L2 D/L- W1/L3
X300
3) Screen connection for cables
A10 4) Connector for 24 V DC power supply
Options
and main contactor
5) Fan connection
3) 3)
A23
6) For cabinet installation:
A23
a) Insulate this part of the unit against
the cabinet walls and door.
b) Loosen fixing screws for fan casing
(M8/SW13) and lift up plastic cover
Level A Level B as far as the cabinettop panel.
6a)
1400
1300
6a) Tighten screws again.
When the units are installed in cabinets,it

must be ensured that the air intake and
6a) exhaust is adequate (for air requirements
and intake air temperature, see Section
14 "Technical Data").
1) No displacement of the centre of gravity

X19 5)
PE2
Weight: refer to Section 14 (Technical Data)
PE2
X9 4)
X19
X9
Dimension: mm
122,5 50
45
40
205 710 258
550 800 483
708
Air intake

06.01
06.01 Connection
3 Connection
WARNING
The units are operated at high voltages.
Only carry out connection work after disconnecting the voltage!
All work on the unit must only be carried out by qualified persons.
Damage or destruction can result if the unit is incorrectly connected.
As the result of the dc link capacitors in the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives, the unit
still contains a hazardous voltage up to 5 min. after isolation. This is why it is only permitted
to open the unit after observing an appropriate waiting time.
The power terminals and control terminals may carry a voltage even when the motor is at
standstill.
When working on the open unit, pay attention to the fact that live parts are exposed. The
unit may only be operated with the front covers attached.
The user is responsible for ensuring that the common rectifier, converter, motor and other
units are installed and connected in accordance with the technical regulations recognized in
the country of installation and other regionally valid regulations. In doing so, particular
attention must be paid to cable dimensioning, fusing, earthing, deactivation, isolation and
overcurrent protection.
CAUTION
The power cables must be fixed in position mechanically outside the unit.
NOTICE
An external 24 V power supply is required for operation of the units (see Chapters 3.5 and 9.3).
Operational range of the unit: 20 V to 30 V.

Common Rectifier Operating instructions
Connection 06.01
3.1 Power connections
DC link 1) DC link
1)
(DC output) (DC output)

C/L+ D/L-
C/L+ D/L-
PE1
Mains 1)
U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3
U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3
PE1
Mains fan
X19
Mains 1)
PE2
Mains fan X9
X19
PE2
X9
Figure 3.1 Mains connection size H Figure 3.2 Mains connection size K
1) Due to the press-in nuts, cable lugs or DC rails can only be connected to the terminal rails from the front.
WARNING
The operating coils of contactors and relays that are connected to the same supply network
as the unit or that are located in close proximity of the unit must be connected to over-
voltage limiters, e.g. RC circuits.
An RCCB (residual-current-operated circuit-breaker) must not be used to protect the
rectifier/regenerating unit (DIN VDE 0160).
Voltage is only permitted to be applied to the unit when SIMOVERT Master Drives are
connected. Operation without a connected DC link capacitor is not permitted!
If the DC link terminals are connected incorrectly or short-circuited, the SIMOVERT Master
Drives inverter will be destroyed!
In order to prevent feedback of interference to the power supply system, limit harmonics
and reduce the current ripple, the total inductance of the power system incoming feeder
connection (power system inductance including commutating reactor) a total relative short-
circuit voltage uk of at least 3% .
Connect the fan power supply to X19.
The fan continues to run for about four minutes or until a certain cooling element
temperature threshold is undershot (provided its power supply is connected) after the unit
has been switched off, following fault messages, on canceling the enable signal and after
isolating the system supply connection.
Despite switching the voltage off at the power terminals, a voltage may still exist on
terminal X19 due to the external fan supply.

06.01 Connection
NOTES
Commutating reactors: Selection of the power system commutating reactors with uk = 2% should be based
on Table 3.4 and Catalog DA93.1.
Fuses: Refer to Table 3.3. for fuse order numbers.
Output reactors in the DC circuit are not permitted (even with the parallel connection of power sections or in
12-pulse mode), because the DC link voltage is measured at the unit output terminals.
Function Terminal Connected load / Description

Incoming supply terminals X1-U1/L1 See Technical Data
X1-V1/L2 Chapter 14
X1-W1/L3
Protective conductor PE/GND
Power terminals X1-C/L+ See Technical Data
DC link voltage X1-D/L- Chapter 14
(inverter)
Fan terminals X19-1 Supply connection for fan
X19-2 230V AC ±10%, 50 to 60 Hz ±5%
Size H
Current consumption: at 50 Hz: 2.6 A, at 60 Hz: 3.3 A
Size K
Current consumption: at 50 Hz: 5.2 A, at 60 Hz: 6.6 A
Table 3.1 Power connections
Terminal X19 fused with fuse (F3 and F4):

T7A/250V time-lag 6.3x32 mm (¼“ x 1¼“)
(19343-T7A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH or 0034.5243 FST Messrs. Schurter)
WARNING
Where the unit is operated in conjunction with a power system, one phase of which is
earthed and not the starpoint, the plant management must ensure that power supply to
the fan circuit (terminals X19-1, X19-2) and to the main contactor circuit (terminal X9-4,
X9-5) is taken from this phase and the starpoint.
Where this cannot be ensured, the power supply to the fan circuit and to the main
contactor circuit must be taken via an isolating transformer.
In addition, the power supply to terminals X19-1, X19-2, X9-4, X9-5 must be taken via an
isolating transformer, when:
• the connection to ground - electronic ground is interrupted (refer to Chapter 3.3.3
"Connection terminals on CUR card").
• the power supply unit is operated in conjunction with a non-grounded power supply
system.

Connection 06.01
The units are designed for permanent connection to the system in keeping with DIN VDE 0160 Section 6.5.2.1.
Protective conductor connection: Min. cross-sectional area 10 mm2 (see Table 3.2).
The conductor cross-sectional areas listed in Table 3.2 are maximum connectable cross-sections. The data is
given for multicore cable. The cross-sectional areas actually wired and the associated connection elements must
be selected according to the currently valid standards - e.g. DIN VDE 100 Part 523, DIN VDE 0276 Part 1000,
UL, CSA, ....
Unit Order No. Rated input Mains DC link Protective

conductor
Conductor Conductor Conductor
U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 C/L+, D/L- PE
voltage current max. max. max. max.
6SE70 (V) (A) mm2 1) AWG 2) mm2 1) AWG 2) mm2 1) AWG 2)
38-2EH85-0AA0 380 to 480 710 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600
S 100x10 S 60x10 S 100x10
41-0EH85-0AA0 380 to 480 888 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600
S 100x10 S 60x10 S 100x10
41-3EK85-0AA0 380 to 480 1156 K 4x300 4x600 K 6x300 6x600 K 4x300 4x600
S 100x10 S 100x10 S 100x10
41-8EK85-0AA0 380 to 480 1542 K 4x300 4x600 K 6x300 6x600 K 4x300 4x600
S 100x10 S 100x10 S 100x10
37-7FH85-0AA0 500 to 600 671 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600
S 100x10 S 60x10 S 100x10
41-0FH85-0AA0 500 to 600 888 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600
S 100x10 S 60x10 S 100x10
41-3FK85-0AA0 500 to 600 1119 K 4x300 4x600 K 6x300 6x600 K 4x300 4x600
S 100x10 S 100x10 S 100x10
S 100x10 S 100x10 S 100x10
S 100x10 S 100x10 S 100x10
37-7HH85-0AA0 660 to 690 671 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600
S 100x10 S 60x10 S 100x10
41-0HH85-0AA0 660 to 690 888 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600 K 4x300 4x600
S 100x10 S 60x10 S 100x10
41-3HK85-0AA0 660 to 690 1119 K 4x300 4x600 K 6x300 6x600 K 4x300 4x600
S 100x10 S 100x10 S 100x10
S 100x10 S 100x10 S 100x10
S 100x10 S 100x10 S 100x10
Table 3.2 Connection cross-sections
1) C=Cable, R=Rail
2) American Wire Gauge

06.01 Connection
Unit Built-in branch fuses F11 to F16

Order No. Siemens SITOR Bussmann
US standard
6SE70 A Type A Type
38-2EH85-0AA0 630 3NE3336 700 170M4717
41-0EH85-0AA0 800 3NE3338-8 900 170M5715
37-7FH85-0AA0 560 3NE3335 630 170M5696
41-0FH85-0AA0 800 3NE3338-8 900 170M5699
37-7HH85-0AA0 560 3NE3335 630 170M5696
41-0HH85-0AA0 800 3NE3338-8 900 170M5699
Built-in branch fuses F111 to F162
41-3EK85-0AA0 630 3NE3336
41-8EK85-0AA0 800 3NE3338-8
41-3FK85-0AA0 560 3NE3335 630 170M5696
41-5FK85-0AA0 710 3NE3337-8 630 170M5696
41-8FK85-0AA0 800 3NE3338-8 800 170M5698
41-3HK85-0AA0 560 3NE3335 630 170M5696
41-5HK85-0AA0 710 3NE3337-8 630 170M5696
41-8HK85-0AA0 800 3NE3338-8 800 170M5698
Table 3.3 Built-in branch fuses
Table 3.3: Semiconductor protection only, lines are not reliably protected.
CAUTION
With these units, no external semiconductor protection is needed.
Line protection must be ensured for all device types by assigning a suitable line protection element (e.g. fuse,
line protection circuit-breaker) to the line cross-sectional area as defined in the currently valid standards – e.g.
DIN VDE 0100 Part 430.

Connection 06.01
3.1.1 Short-circuit withstand capability
In the event of a line-side short-circuit in front of the super-fast built-in fuses, the power fed in from the supply
depends on the protective devices provided on the system-side (NH fuses or circuit-breakers).
To ensure that the forces and temperatures that result from short-circuits of this type can be kept within
acceptable limits for the units, the following values calculated in accordance with DIN VDE 0660 Part 500 must
be complied with by the supply and by the fuses or circuit-breakers connected before the unit.
Size H:
Rated short-time withstand current: Icw = 27.86 kA / 1s or Icw = 88.1 kA / 0,1s
Rated surge withstand current: Ipk = 85 kA
The power rails must be mechanically buffered to absorb the short-circuit forces directly in front of their entry
point into the unit.
Size K:
Rated short-time withstand current: Icw = 69,86 kA / 1s or Icw = 220 kA / 0,1s
Rated surge withstand current: Ipk = 85 kA
The power rails must be mechanically buffered to absorb the short-circuit forces directly in front of their entry
point into the unit.
Unit Order No. Rated input Commutating reactor 2%

Type Voltage / Frequency Rated
current
voltage current
6SE70 (V) (A) (V / Hz) (V / Hz) (A)
38-2EH85-0AA0 380 to 480 710 4EU3651-8UA00 400/50 460/60 720
41-0EH85-0AA0 380 to 480 888 4EU3651-0UB00 400/50 460/60 910
41-3EK85-0AA0 380 to 480 1156 4EU3651-1UB00 400/50 460/60 1120
41-8EK85-0AA0 380 to 480 1542 4EU3951-2UB00 400/50 460/60 1600
37-7FH85-0AA0 500 to 600 671 4EU3651-3UA00 500/50 710
41-0FH85-0AA0 500 to 600 888 4EU3651-4UA00 500/50 910
41-3FK85-0AA0 500 to 600 1119 4EU3951-2UA00 500/50 1120
41-5FK85-0AA0 500 to 600 1306 4EU3951-3UA00 500/50 1250
41-8FK85-0AA0 500 to 600 1633 4EU4351-2UA00 500/50 1600
37-7HH85-0AA0 660 to 690 671 4EU3651-7UA00 690/50 710
41-0HH85-0AA0 660 to 690 888 4EU3951-0UA00 690/50 910
41-3HK85-0AA0 660 to 690 1119 4EU3951-5UA00 690/50 1120
41-5HK85-0AA0 660 to 690 1306 4EU4351-0UA00 690/50 1400
41-8HK85-0AA0 660 to 690 1633 4EU4551-0UA00 690/50 1600
Table 3.4 Recommended commutating reactor

06.01 Connection
3.2 Power supply and main contactor

The power supply and main contactor control circuit are connected through five-pin connector X9 (at the bottom-
left of the unit).
Single-core cables with conductor cross-sections of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 PS Main contactor
(AWG: 24 to 14) can be connected to X9 (finely stranded 1.5 mm2 with 24V DC control
core end ferrules).
P M
The main contactor is driven over isolated contacts X9.4 and X9.5. 1 2 3 4 5
Technical specifications of main contact control circuit: 230V∼

X9
max. 5A∼ at p.f.≥0.4; max. making capacity 3000VA;
with switching voltage of 30 V DC, max 8A DC 230V AC
Figure 3.3 24 V DC and main contactor

control connections
Terminal Function description
X9-1 DC +24V (tolerance range 20V - 30V) max. current consumption 2A at +24V
max. current consumption without options:
1A for basic unit (master)
0.3A for parallel unit (slave)
X9-2 Reference potential for DC X9-1
X9-3 not connected (N.C.)
X9-4 Main contactor control circuit
X9-5 Main contactor control circuit
Table 3.5 Connector X9 pin assignments for auxiliary power supply and main contactor control
Terminal X9.1 fused with fuse (F1) T2A/250V time-lag 5x20mm

(19198-T2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH or 0034.3993 FSD Messrs. Schurter)
and for parallel unit via connector x27 (for size K):
fused with fuse (F5) T2A/250V time-lag 5x20mm
(19198-T2A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH or 0034.3993 FSD Messrs. Schurter)
Terminal X9.2 fused with fuse (F2) T7A/250V time-lag 6.3x32mm (¼“ x 1¼“)
(19343-T7A/250V Messrs. Wickmann-Werke GmbH and/or 0034.5243 FST Messrs. Schurter)
NOTICE
The main contactor’s operating coil must be protected, for example, by RC elements.
See also Warnings in Chapter 3.1 after Table 3.1 with regard to isolating transformer feed-in..

Connection 06.01
3.3 Control terminal block and serial interface
WARNING
The common rectifier must be isolated before connecting the control leads to the CUR.
You can control the common rectifier over the following interfaces:
♦ Control terminal block on the CUR electronic module
♦ RS 485 serial interface on the CUR electronic module
♦ Operator control panel OP1S (see Chapter 9 Options)
♦ RS485 and RS232 serial interface on the PMU X300
CAUTION
The CUR incorporates ESD-endangered components that may be destroyed if improperly
handled.
See also under the measures recommended to protect ESD-endangered components in
the introductory chapter entitled "General".
3.3.1 Connectors for the control terminal block
Conductors with cross-sectional areas of 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG: 26 to 16), or 1 mm2 (AWG: 18), finely
stranded with core end ferrules, can be connected to the connectors (Recommended: 0.5 mm2 (AWG: 20)).
3.3.2 Connecting the control leads
NOTICE
In general, control wires connected directly to the converter should be shielded to ensure that the highest
level of noise immunity is achieved. The shielding must be grounded at both ends. On the unit's housing,
the shield is connected with shield clamps. Handling of these clamps is shown in Figure 3.4.
To prevent the injection of disturbance, control wires connected directly to the unit must be laid separately
from power cables. Minimum distance 20 cm.
If they intersect, control and power cables must be run at an angle of 90° to each other.
If converters are installed in systems by authorized workshops, noise immunity can also be provided by
other appropriate wiring practices.

06.01 Connection
Fitting the shielding clamp

Cable binder Ø ≤ 15mm Ø ≤ 7.5mm Ø ≤ 5mm
Connector
Slide on shield
and secure with
shrink-on tubing,
for example
Adapt length
to design
Do not bend
spring over
Releasing the shielding clamp
35
manually or using a screwdriver,
press the clamp together and extract
it in the updown direction.
Shield Caution!
The clamps are sharp-edged!
Figure 3.4 Connecting the control leads and handling the shielding clamps
3.3.3 Terminals and setting elements on the CUR (A10) module
R135 A10
CUR
PMU
X100 S1
S2
X101
X102
R136
X104
Figure 3.5 Control terminals and setting elements on the CUR
• DIP switches S1, S2: Both open: No bus termination for the RS485 interface (terminals X100-1 to X100-4)
Both closed: Bus termination for the RS485 interface active (1500Ω between
RS485P and RS485N, 3900Ω from RS485P to +5V supply, 390Ω
from RS485N to earth)
Note: Application: When using the optional operator panel OP1S at the basic device
interface SST1 (X100 or X300), DIP switches S1 and S2 must be closed.
• R135 and R136: 0Ω resistances as earth-frame (M) connection
M is connected to earth when the unit is supplied. Remove these resistances only to
avoid faults due to earth loops, i.e. if the electronics frame is connected in some other
way to earth (e.g. through signal leads or the frame terminal of the power supply unit).
If option modules are used, a further earth-frame (M) connection may have to be
removed. (please refer to the description of these modules).

Connection 06.01
Electronics terminals:
Function Terminal Connected loads/Description

Serial interface X100-1 RS485P Plus line
RS485 (Bus) X100-2 RS485N Minus line Send and receive line
X100-3 RS485P Plus line (difference input/output)
X100-4 RS485N Minus line
X100-5 Signal frame
For functions see Section 4.3.6.1
Binary inputs X101-6 P24S +24V power supply for external
contacts, max. load 100mA
X101-7 Frame for binary signals
X101-8 Frame for binary signals
X101-9 Binary input 1
Low level: -0.6V - 3V or floating terminals

High level: 13V - 33V
Input current at 24V: ca. 10mA
For functions see Section 4.3.2
Analog outputs X102-14 Analog output resolution ±8 bits,
For functions see Section 4.3.5
X102-15 Frame for analog outputs
X102-16 Actual current value: 0V - ±5V corresponds to
0A - ± rated DC current
Display range: 0 - ±10V, max. 5mA load, current limited

Binary outputs X104-17 Binary output 1, pin 1
X104-18 Binary output 1, pin 2

The binary outputs are normally-open relay contacts

At 50V AC max. switching voltage, the following applies:
Max. switching current 1A~ at p.f. =1
Max. switching current 0.12A AC at p.f. = 0.4
At max. 30V DC switching voltage, the following
applies::
Max. switching current 0.8A (resistive loads)
For functions see Section 4.3.3 and 4.3.1.2 (status
word)
Table 3.6 Control terminal block

06.01 Connection
3.3.4 Connecting-up the parameterizing unit (PMU)
A serial connection to automation unit or a PC can be realized via

connector X300 on the PMU.The cables must be shielded and
connected to ground at both ends. (See Sec. 3.3.2). Thus,
the rectifier/regenerating unit can be controlled and operated from
the central control station or control room.
X300
P 5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Figure 3.6 Parameterizing unit (PMU)
PMU -X300 Description

1 Housing ground
2 Receive line, RS232 standard (V.24)
3 Transmit- and receive line, RS485, two-wire, positive differential input/output
4 RTS (Request to send; for direction reversal in the case of interface converters
5 Ref. potential (ground)
6 5 V power supply for OP1S
7 Transmit line, RS232 standard (V.24)
8 Transmit- and receive line RS485, two-wire, negative differential input/output
9 Ref. potential for RS232 or RS485 interface
Table 3.7 Connector pin assignment for interface X300
Pin assignment for interface cable X300:
1 1
6 6
2 2
7 7
3 3
8 8
4 4
9 9
5 5
on PC, COMx: male on 6SE70 device, X300: female

on cable: female on cable: male

Connection 06.01
3.4 Measures for keeping to RFI suppression regulations
So that you can observe the radio interference regulations, you must note the following points:
• Grounding
The converter necessarily generates radio interference as it functions. It is necessary to return them to
source via a connection with as low resistance as possible (cross-sectional area of ground connection
cross-sectional area of network connection).
Use the best grounding opportunity when installing the infeed unit and optional radio interference
suppression filters (e.g. mounting plate, grounding cable, ground bus). Interconnect all conductive housings
with a large contact surface.
For interference suppression not only the cross-sectional area (observe safety regulations in case of fault),
but especially the contact surface is important because high-frequency interference currents do not flow
through the entire cross-sectional area but mainly along the outside skin of a conductor.
• Shielding
To reduce interference and observe the radio interference suppression levels,
- shielded cable must be used between the converter output and the motor and
- shielded control cables laid.
The shield must be connected to ground potential at both ends.
• Filters
The radio interference filters must be connected before the infeed unit. The housings must be
interconnected conductively.
To observe the radio interference suppression regulations, A1 interference suppression filters are
recommended.
NOTICE
Perform hipot tests on systems with radio interference suppression filters with direct voltage because of the
filter capacitors!
Control cables that are directly connected with the converter are always shielded so that the highest possible
interference immunity is achieved. The shield must be grounded at both ends.
To avoid coupled interference, control cables directly connected to the device must be routed separately from
power cables. Minimum distance 20 cm.
If converters are installed in systems by authorized workshops, interference immunity can be ensured by other
suitable wiring practices.
See also "SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Installation instructions for design of drives in conformance with EMC
regulations“ under "Documentation" on the SIMOVIS CD-ROM of the inverter or converter "compendium"
Chapter 3.

3.5
06.01
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V

3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
Figure 3.7
of the main power switch 3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
K1
24V-power
supply unit Filter
+ - (optional)
binary selecting inputs
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
RS485 => OP1, SIMOVIS
RS232 => SIMOVIS
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
X101
X300

F5 F1 F2
P24 M M K1-2
PE X1: U1 V1 W1
L1 L2 L3
X308 X108
Power supply
PMU A10
C98043-A1680 +5V +15V -15V +24V
Load
RESET
X109 X239
Fuse
L_DSAVE
Option modules X107 monitoring
3
BI
12
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement, Size H

P5
X100 390W Microprocessor selection: Voltage

RS485P X21.2
1 Open and closed-loop measurement
2 control of the DC link
S1
RS485 3 150W voltage A23 X30-1 ϑ
RS485N
4 C98043-A1685 X30-2 R100
5 M
S2 E1 M
P5 390W 1~
R15 M
X115
P
1 R16 10nF
RS485
ENGLISH
N M
2 820k X29.3 X20.2 X20.1
P A01 I ist BO
RS485 3 TTL X29.2
N R135
4 X29.1
Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements
M X116 R136 M
5 M
X27 F3 F4
X117 10nF
A2 X102 X104 X19-1 X19-2
C98043-A1690 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
binary selecting outputs X19-1 X19-2

analog outputs X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
1AC 230V
3-13
Connection
3-14
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V
3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
of the main power switch 3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
Figure 3.8
Connection
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
K1
24V-power
supply unit Filter
+ - (optional)
binary selecting inputs
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
RS485 => OP1, SIMOVIS
ENGLISH
RS232 => SIMOVIS
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
X101
X300
F5 F1 F2
P24 M M K1-2
PE X1: U1 V1 W1
L1 L2 L3
X308 X108
Power supply
PMU A10
C98043-A1680 +5V +15V -15V +24V
Load
RESET
X109 X239
Fuse
L_DSAVE
Option modules X107 monitoring
3
BI
12
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement, Size K

P5
X100 390W Microprocessor selection: Voltage

RS485P X21.2
1 Open and closed-loop measurement
2 control of the DC link
S1
RS485 3 150W voltage A23 X30-1 ϑ
RS485N
4 C98043-A1685 X30-2 R100
5 M
S2 E2 M E1 M
P5 390W 1~ 1~
R15 M
X115
P
1 R16 10nF
N RS485 M
2 820k X29.3 X20.2 X20.1
P A01 Iist BO
RS485 3 TTL X29.2
N R135
4 X29.1
M X116 R136 M
5 M
X27 F3 F4
X117 10nF
A2 X102 X104 X19-1 X19-2
C98043-A1690 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Connections for

parallel unit
binary selecting outputs X19-1 X19-2
analog outputs X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
1AC 230V

06.01
3.6
06.01
PE X1: U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3 C/L+ D/L-
Figure 3.9
E1 M
1~
Termal sensor ϑ
on the heatsink
R100
X20-1
X20-2
X47-1
K k K k X47-4
T1 T2
R75
R77
R79
X47-3
Power section, Size H

Load 1
X31-1 L l L l X47-2
X31-2
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3

Power sections
R76
R78
R80
Load 2
X239
K101-2
F14 F16 F12
A10-X109 F11 F13 F15
(C98043-A1680)
X11-1 X14-2
X11-2 X14-1
K11 G11 K14 G14
X27 V11 V14
K A K A
X24-1
X24-2
XU11PAR C11 R11 R14 C14
F5 XU11
T2A
X13-1 X16-2
F1 X13-2 X16-1
X9-1 T2A K13 G13 K16 G16
+
K
V13 A K
V16 A
24V-power F2
supply unit X9-2 T7A X26-1
- X26-2
XV13PAR C13 R13 R16 C16
XV13
X9-3 N.C.
X9-4 X15-1 X12-2
K1-2
Main contactor X15-2 X12-1
X9-5 K15 G15 K12 G12
K
V15 A K
V12 A
ENGLISH
X22-1
F4 X22-2
T7A
X19-2
XW15PAR C15 R15 R12 C12
230V~ F3
T7A XW15 X21-2
X19-1
A23 A23
C98043-A1685 C98043-A1685
3-15
Connection
3-16
Figure 3.10
Connection
PE X1: U1/L1 V1/L2 W1/L3 C/L+ D/L-
Power section, Size K E2 M E1 M
1~ 1~
X47-1
ENGLISH
Termal sensor ϑ
on the heatsink K k K k X47-4
X20-1
X20-2
Load 1
R75
R77
R79
R100 T1 T2 X47-3
L l L l X47-2
Load 2
R76
R78
R80
X31-1
X29-1
X29-2
X29-3
X31-2
X239
F112
F111
F141
F142
F132
F131
F161
F162
F152
F151
F121
F122
K101-2
A10-X109
X11-1 X14-2
(C98043-A1680) X11-2 X14-1
K11 G11 K14 G14
K
V11 A K
V14 A
X24-1
X27 X24-2
XU11PAR C11 R11 R14 C14

Connections for XU11
parallel unit
X13-1 X16-2
F5 X13-2 X16-1
T2A K13 G13 K16 G16
K
V13 A K
V16 A
F1
X9-1 T2A X26-1
+ X26-2
24V-power F2
supply unit T7A XV13PAR C13 R13 R16 C16
X9-2
- XV13
X15-1 X12-2
X15-2 X12-1
X9-3 N.C. K15 G15 K12 G12
X9-4 V15 V12

K1-2 K A K A
Main contactor X9-5 X22-1
X22-2
XW15PAR C15 R15 R12 C12

F4
T7A XW15 X21-2
X19-2
230V~ F3
T7A
X19-1
A23 A23
C98043-A1685 C98043-A1685
06.01
06.01 Connection
V11 V13 V15
Level B (rear level)
V14 V16 V12
Level A (front level)
Figure 3.11 Arrangement of the thyristor blocks, Size H
Level A Level B
V11 V14
V13 V16
V15 V12
Figure 3.12 Arrangement of the thyristor blocks, view from right-hand side of unit,Size K

Connection 06.01
3.7 Parallel connection of parallel unit(s), size K

The output current can be increased by connecting up to 2 "parallel" units of identical rated current in parallel
with the power section of a common rectifier of size K (basic unit).
The following table shows for each basic unit order number, the order number for the corresponding parallel unit
that can be connected in parallel.
Order No. for basic unit Order No. for parallel unit for
connecting in parallel
6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0 6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0 6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0 6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0 6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0 6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0 6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0 6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0 6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
Table 3.8 Corresponding basic and parallel units
The parallel units have the same technical data as the corresponding basic units.
The parallel units do not include a CUR electronic module and are fitted with a C98043-A1695 (A23) Power
Interface module instead of a C98043-A1685 (A23) Power Interface module.
The parallel units do not require a separate external 24V power supply (via X9). The contactor for the parallel
unit(s) is controlled via X9 of the basic device. Please observe contact ratings (if not sufficient, use an auxiliary
relay).
A 50-core ribbon cable is used to transfer firing pulse signals and monitoring signals. It also carries the power
supply for the parallel units.
Parallel connection to a basic unit:
The female terminal strip X27 on module A23 of the basic unit is connected to the male terminal strip X28 on
module A23 of the parallel unit via a 50-core ribbon cable.
Parallel connection of a second parallel unit:
The female terminal strip X27 on module A23 of the first parallel unit is connected to the male terminal strip X28
on module A23 of the second parallel unit via a 50-core ribbon cable.
The parallel unit(s) should be installed to the left of the basic unit (see Figure 3.13).
Parallel unit Parallel unit Basic unit
Secure cable, whose insulation has Secure cable, whose insulation has
been stripped over a length of 30mm, been stripped over a length of 30mm,
by means of a shield clamp. by means of a shield clamp.
A23 A23 A23

C98043- C98043- C98043-
A1695 A1695 A1685
X27 X27 X27
X28 X28
Figure 3.13 Connection of firing pulse signals and monitoring signals for the parallel units

06.01 Connection
NOTES
The permissible output current for a parallel arrangement is reduced (due to the current division between the
power sections) by 10% as compared with the sum of the rated currents of the separate power sections.
The following is required to ensure even current distribution between the basic unit and parallel unit(s).
♦ Use of identical power components (see above table for the corresponding parallel units and basic unit)
♦ Identical phases for the power section connections of the common rectifiers between the basic units and
parallel unit(s)
♦ Commutating reactors specific for each basic and parallel unit with identical technical data. Each separate
parallel path must have a minimum uk value of 2%!
Basic unit
X117 X27
X28
Mains DC link
Parallel unit (1)
X27
X28
Parallel unit 2
♦ Identical fuses for basic unit and parallel unit(s)

♦ Identical cable lengths leading to the power section connections of the basic and parallel units
Output reactors in the DC circuit are not permitted.
WARNING
Fault-free operation can only be guaranteed if the phases at the power section
terminals (U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3, C/L+ and D/L-) between the basic unit and
parallel unit(s) are identical.
Non-compliance with this condition may result in destruction of the power
sections of the basic and parallel units.
The maximum permissible total cable length between the basic unit and parallel unit 1 or parallel unit 2 (if
present) is 15 m.
A 50-way shielded round cable with a length of 4 m is contained in the scope of supply of a parallel unit (spare
parts order No.: 6SY7010-8AA00).
Order No. for one cable "10 m round, screened": 6QX5368 (other lengths on request):
On connecting this round, 50-core cable with a diameter of 14 mm, its screen has to be laid bare by cutting away
the insulation and it must be connected to earth on both devices. With regard to the immunity to interference of
the system, it is recommended that the cable be installed in a separately earthed shielded cable duct.
The cable length within the unit from the connector on the A23 module (X27 or X28) to the top edge of the unit
on the rear panel (cabinet wall) is 1m to the left and 1.8 m to the right. This includes the spare length required for
removing the A23 module with its carrier board for service purposes.

Connection 06.01
WARNING
When the A23 module of a parallel unit is removed for servicing, the terminals of
the current transformers are open. The parallel unit must not be operated,
otherwise the current transformers of the parallel unit can be damaged by
currents from the snubber RC network.
Non-compliance may result in the destruction of the current transformer of a
parallel unit.
Parameterization:
Parameter P076 (configuration of the power section)
P076 = 01x ....1 common rectifier parallel unit is connected in parallel with the basic unit
P076 = 02x ....2 common rectifier parallel units is connected in parallel with the basic unit
HINWEIS
With the parameterization P076=00x, a connected parallel unit still receives firing pulses and carries current, it
is only the monitoring for current asymmetry (over-current or under-current in the parallel power section as
compared to the current in the basic unit, -F034) that is not active.
The results of the thyristor test (selected via P353) are only conditionally applicable when units are connected
in parallel.
Start-up:
The start-up procedure is exactly the same as in the case of a single basic unit. The final cabling (parallel
connection of the power sections and coupling via the 50-core ribbon cable) must however already exist
because the parallel units also carry current during circuit identification.
Note: In the case of 1 or 2 parallel units connected in parallel, the value of parameter P144 (DC link
capacitance) only represents a half or 1/3 of the actual DC link capacitance because parameter P075 for
the basic unit contains the rated current for a single power section.
LED display on the A23 power interface module (C98043-A1695) of a parallel unit:
Green LED (H11) lit: The power supply on this parallel unit is operating.
Yellow LED (H12) lit: On this parallel unit, the highest temperature of any power section connected in parallel
has been measured (this does not necessarily mean over-temperature). If the yellow H12
LED is not lit on any of the parallel units, the highest temperature is currently measured at
the power section of the basic unit.
Red LED (H13) lit: A fuse has fused on this parallel unit.
CAUTION
On parallel connection the rating of the relay contact K1-2 (connection X9-4, X9-5) should be taken into
account (refer to Chapter 3.2).

06.01
3.7.1
3AC 50-60Hz, 400V

3AC 50-60Hz, 500V
3AC 50-60Hz, 690V
Figure 3.14
1AC 50-60Hz, 230V
of the main power switch
Parallel unit 24V power

Basic unit
K3 K2
Filter supply unit Filter
Connections for + -
(optional) (optional)
second parallel unit
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
K1
X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X9-5
K1-2
PE X1: U1 V1 W1 PE X1: U1 V1 W1
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Load
X27 X28 X27 Load
Fuse Fuse
monitoring monitoring
3 3
12 12
Voltage
measurement
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit for parallel connection, size K

A23
C98043-A1685
ϑ ϑ
A23
C98043-A1695
Termistor Termistor
ENGLISH
Power section, parallel unit
Power section, basic unit
Fan unit Fan unit

X239
X19-2 X19-1 X19-1 X19-2
X1: C/L+ X1: D/L- X1: C/L+ X1: D/L-
Single-line diagram with suggested circuit arrangement for parallel connection
X19-2 X19-1 X19-1 X19-2

to electronics module
1AC 230V A10-X109 1AC 230V
DC 510V - 620V
DC 675V - 780V
DC 890V - 930V
3-21
Connection
Connection 06.01
3.8 12-pulse mode (only possible with the optional RS485 interface)
3.8.1 General information on 12-pulse mode, application
12-pole operation is possible only with equipment software version 3.0 and higher.
12-pulse mode is implemented to reduce the harmonic loading on the mains supply..
Two 6SE70 units (common rectifiers) are connected in parallel on the output side and supplied on the line side
with two 3-phase AC supplies, galvanically isolated and with a phase offset of 30 degrees. One unit, the "12-
pulse master", controls the DC link voltage and provides the setpoint current for the other unit, the "12-pulse
slave".
Note: A unit described here as a "slave" is a completely normal common rectifier with a CUR electronic module
and is only transformed into a "12-pulse slave" by the appropriate parameterization. The term "12-pulse slave"
must not be confused with a "parallel unit" for the connection of power sections in parallel because the latter
does not contain a CUR electronic module and has a different order No. (see Section 3.7).
The two 3-phase galvanically isolated AC supplies with a phase offset of 30 degrees are usually generated using
a transformer with 2 different secondary systems (e.g. Y y6 d5, i.e. primary winding: star, secondary winding 1:
star, secondary winding 2: delta). A transformer of this type will be referred to below as a "12-pulse transformer".
To implement 12-pulse mode, the two common rectifiers must be coupled via a fast serial link. The SST2 serial
interface for the basic unit is used for this purpose which is however only available as an RS485 interface once
the optional A2 submodule (C98043-A1690) has been plugged into the A10 CUR electronic module (C98043-
A1680). See Sections 9.6 and 3.8.7).
The transmission protocol used for SST2 is the "Peer-to-Peer" protocol.

06.01 Connection
3.8.2 Hardware requirements, configuration of the power sections
The sub-currents of the 3-phase AC supplies are decoupled on the line side (line side with respect to the unit
terminals) through inductances (due to the secondary leakage inductance of the 12-pulse transformer,
commutating reactors).
Note: A 12-pulse transformer alone is not always sufficient for decoupling because the two secondary windings
of the transformer are magnetically coupled. When the "12-pulse master" and the "12-pulse slave" are directly
supplied from a "high-power" 12-pulse transformer (i.e. without the intermediate connection of commutating
reactors), the DC link currents (in non-pulsating operation) each comprise 30 degree current blocks because at
intervals of 30 degrees, a commutating process takes place from secondary winding 1 to secondary winding 2 or
vice-versa. Only if you use a 12-pulse transformer with sufficiently large secondary leakage inductances (or low
magnetic coupling between secondary winding 1 and secondary winding 2) or if you use a " double-tier
transformer", in which no magnetic coupling exists between the two secondary voltage systems, is it possible to
dispense with additional commuting reactors.
The following points must be complied with:

• Supply of the power sections of the 12-pulse master and the 12-pulse slave from galvanically isolated
3-phase AC systems
• Decoupled infeeds - i.e. commuting reactors after the 12-pulse transformer or 12-pulse transformer with
sufficiently large secondary leakage inductances (or low magnetic coupling between secondary winding 1 and
secondary winding 2) or use of a "double-tier transformer".
• Identical inductances in the 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave power section branches.
• Identical voltage levels at the 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave, otherwise with a control angle of 0
degrees, this will cause unequal current division (with a control angle of 0 degrees, closed-loop control is not
possible - the unit with the higher voltage level carries more current).
• With Ud reduction, current asymmetry (as a result of a control angle of 0 degrees and differing voltage levels)
can be prevented or considerably reduced.
• An output reactor must not be used in the DC link.
Recommended power section configurations:

Note: It is of no consequence whether the "12-pulse master" or "12-pulse slave" is supplied by the delta winding
of the 12-pulse transformer. It is only important that a phase offset of 30 degrees is present between the two
galvanically isolated supplies. In contrast to the following configuration examples, the "12-pulse master" and "12-
pulse slave" can also be exchanged with respect to their connection to the "12-pulse transformer".
a) Power section incoming feeder for two power supply units

Refer to the notes in Chapter 3.1 for details of the decoupling (commutating) reactors between the 12-pole
transformer outputs and the incoming supply rectifier bridge.
"12-pulse transformer" Reactor

12-pulse master
Mains X117 DC link

X117
Reactor
12-pulse slave
Figure 3.15 Power section incoming feeder for two power supply units

Connection 06.01
b) Example of a configuration for 12-pulse mode and parallel connection of units of size K to obtain the
maximum output current
With the following power section arrangement 2 equipment groups of type of construction K operate in 12-
pole operation, in order to achieve the maximum possible output current. The first equipment group
comprises a basic unit configured to act as the "12-pole master“, with which 2 parallel units (containing no
CUR electronic card, refer to Chapter 3.7) are connected in parallel. The second equipment group comprises
a basic unit configured to act as the "12-pole slave“, with which likewise 2 parallel units are connected in
parallel.
Reactor Basic unit

(12-pulse master)
X117 X27
X28
Reactor
Parallel unit
X27
X28
"12-pulse transformer" Reactor

Parallel unit
Mains DC link
Reactor Basic unit

(12-pulse slave)
X117 X27
X28
Reactor
Parallel unit
X27
X28
Reactor
Parallel unit
Figure 3.16 Example of a configuration for 12-pulse mode and parallel connection of units of size K to obtain the maximum output
current
3.8.3 Parameterization for 12-pulse mode
In this application, two 6SE70 units (common rectifiers) are coupled via the SST2 serial interface (optional
RS485 interface PTP1) using "Peer-to-Peer" protocol. One unit is parameterized as a 12-pulse master and one
is parameterized as a 12-pulse slave.
Selection of the basic or reserve setting (index i001 or i002) of the appropriate "Source selection parameter“
(P554, P555, ...) is described in Section 4.1.2.

06.01 Connection
"12-pulse master"-6SE70 unit "12 pulse slave"-6SE70 unit

Function: Controls the DC link voltage and provides Function: In current control mode, receives the
the setpoint current for the 12-pulse slave unit via the setpoint current and control commands via the SST2
SST2 interface and control commands (and receives interface from the 12-pulse master (and sends
control commands). control commands).
P051= 3 (Access level: Expert mode) P051= 3 (Access level: Expert mode)
SST2 interface definition: SST2 interface definition:
P688= 1 (protocol selection "Peer-to-Peer") P688= 1 (protocol selection "Peer-to-Peer")
P684.i003= 13 (baudrate 187500 Bd) P684.i003= 13 (baudrate 187500 Bd)
(factory setting) (factory setting)
P686.i003= 2 (2 process data words) P686.i003= 2 (2 process data words)
P687.i003= 1 ms (telegram failure time) P687.i003= 1 ms (telegram failure time)
(factory setting) (see Section 3.8.6) (factory setting) (see Section 3.8.6)
SST2 send channel: SST2 send channel:
P681.i001= 599 (1st process data item is P681.i001= 599 (1st process data item is
control/status word for 12-pulse mode) control/status word for 12-pulse mode)
P681.i002= 34 (2nd process data item is the setpoint
current)
(factory setting)
Use of SST2 receive data: Use of SST2 receive data:
P573.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (1st receive data is P554.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (ON/OFF1)
source for "No external fault 3")
P555.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (not OFF2)
(but should only be parameterized when the 12-pulse
master is required to go into the "fault" state in the (with the "fault" state for the 12-pulse master or when
event of a 12-pulse slave fault - see Section 3.8.6) "no 12-pulse mode" is selected on the 12-pulse
master (see P583.i001 or i002), OFF2 is signaled)
P561.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (Run enable)
(the 12-pulse slave only receives the run enable
when the 12-pulse master is in the "run" state)
P566.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (RESET)
(Source 2 for reset... this facilitates an external reset
from the master)
P486.i001 (or i002) = 6002 (2nd receive data item is
the setpoint current)
Definition of the unit as a 12-pulse unit: Definition of the unit as a 12-pulse unit:
P583.i001 (or i002) = 1 (12-pulse mode is selected) P583.i001 (or i002) = 1 (12-pulse mode is selected)
Definition of the unit as a master or slave: Definition of the unit as a master or slave:
P587.i001 (or i002) = 0 (master) P587.i001 (or i002) = 1 (slave)
(factory setting)
Special functions: Special functions:
P354 = 0 (Earth short-circuit test deactivated when P354 = 0 (Earth short-circuit test deactivated when
the unit is supplied by a non-earthed supply - e.g. the unit is supplied by a non-earthed supply - e.g.
from the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer) from the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer)
Table 9 Parameterization for 12-pulse mode

Connection 06.01
3.8.4 Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599) and control word 2, bit 23
The following table shows how the bits of the control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599) are formed from the
bits of control words 1 and 2 (r550, r551), the bits of status word 1 (r552), the bits of the first SST2 receive data
(r599 sent from the Peer-to-Peer partner) and the internal unit status with Boolean arithmetic or how these bits
are connected together (negation is represented with a slash):
Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599)

Bit Logical linking (or meaning in the high state)
r599.0 r550.0 (ON or not OFF1) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.1 r550.1 (run condition or not OFF2) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.2 r550.2
r599.3 r552.2 (Message for RUN state)
r599.4 (for internal diagnostic purposes: 1, as long as trigger delay is running, as of Software Version 4.3)
r599.5 Message: Unit is a Rectifier/Regenarating Unit (high state: Unit is a comon rectifier)
(P070 ≤ 100) (P070 ≥ 101)
r599.6 Message: DC link forming or current identification is being carried out
r599.7 r550.7 (fault reset)
r599.8 r550.8 (typing 1 ON) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.9 r550.9 (typing 2 ON) AND /r552.3 (no fault) AND r551.23 (12-pulse mode is selected)
r599.10 r550.10 (PLC control)
r599.11 r550.11 (Ud-reduction requested)
r599.12 r552.10 (Message: "Regenerating ready") or
High when with 12-pulse mode selected (r551.23= 1), the unit is held in state r000 = "--" (because
"circuit identification" or "forming" is taking place on the partner unit, or because the unit is waiting
for the "run" state of the 12-pulse slave unit (while the slave unit is carrying out the earth short-
circuit test and the maximum waiting time of 5 s in state r000 = "--" has not yet elapsed))
Dieses Bit ist bei einer Einspeiseeinheit nicht von Bedeutung !
r599.13 r552.3 (Message: NO fault)
r599.14 r552.14 (Message: "Motoring" (Rectifier bridge is carrying current or is ready to carry current or
neither rectifier nor regenerating bridge are carrying current))
Dieses Bit ist bei einer Einspeiseeinheit nicht von Bedeutung !
r599.15 r550.15 (No external fault 1)
Table 10 Control/status word for 12-pulse mode (r599)

06.01 Connection
Control word 2 (r551), bit 23: 12-pulse mode selection command
Associated source selection parameter: P583

Low state: "no 12-pulse mode", i.e. there is only one "normal unit"
High state: "12-pulse mode is selected"
The command is effective in the high state and effects the following changes with respect to the operational
behavior of a single unit (i.e. a "normal single unit" becomes a 12-pulse master or 12-pulse slave depending on
control word 2, bit 27, or the associated source selection parameter P587.i001 or i002):
♦ The P-gain of the Ud controller is halved internally according to P313 and the DC link capacitance P144 of
the 12-pulse master is halved internally but only when the 12-pulse slave reports the "run" operating state to
the 12-pulse master via r599 (bit 3 of the first SST2 receive data).
♦ During "forming" or "circuit identification", only one unit is permitted to carry current. This prevents firing of the
thyristors of the rectifier bridge in the "run" operating state on the 12-pulse master or 12-pulse slave by
forcing the state r000 = "--", when the corresponding partner unit reports via r599 (bit 6 of the first SST2
receive telegram) that "forming" or "circuit identification" is being carried out. Apart from which, on the unit
that is held in the state r000= "--", error message F061 (fault value 3) is suppressed.
♦ On completion of "forming" or "circuit identification" of the partner unit (i.e. with the trailing edge of bit 6 of the
first SST2 receive data), the unit switches to the operating state SWITCH-ON INHIBITED (r000=°008).
♦ On switch-on, on the 12-pulse master following the °012 operating state (test phase - earth short-circuit test),
firing of the thyristors of the rectifier bridge by forcing the state r000 = "--" is prevented until the 12-pulse slave
reports the "run" operating state via r599 (bit 3 of the first SST2 receive data) or until a maximum waiting time
of 5 s has elapsed. During this waiting time, the 12-pulse slave is given the opportunity of carrying out the
earth short-circuit test. In addition, ramping up of the pre-charging ramp (parameter P329) is prevented.
♦ Bits 0, 1, 8 and 9 of r599 (control/status word for 12-pulse mode) are linked with control word bit 23 such that
an ON command is only passed on via r599 when control word bit 23 is 1 ("12-pulse mode is selected").
Note: The prerequisite for 12-pulse mode is that the 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave are coupled via the
SST2 serial interface using Peer-to-Peer protocol (P688=1) and that in each case, the "control/status word for
12-pulse mode" (r599) is transmitted in word 1 of the transmission protocol (P681.i001= 599).
3.8.5 Start-up with 12-pulse mode
♦ Linking the units via SST2 RS485 interface

Mount the optional A2 submodule (C98043-A1690) on the A10 CUR electronic module (C98043-A1680) of
master and slave (see Section 9.6) and connecting an interface cable (RS485 4-core cable, see Section
3.8.7) on the 5-pole terminal block -X117 of A2.
♦ Parameterizing a unit as a 12-pulse master (see Section 3.8.3)

Following "Generate factory setting" (see Section 4.3.9.1), only the following parameters have to be set:
• P051= 3 (expert mode)
• P688 = 1 (select Peer-to-Peer protocol)
• P583.i001 (or i002) = 1 (12-pulse mode is selected)
• P573.i001 (or i002) = 6001 (only set when the 12-pulse master is also required to go into the "fault" state
in the event of a 12-pulse slave fault - see Section 3.8.6)
• Switch off earth short-circuit test (P354 = 0), when the unit is supplied by a non-earthed supply - e.g. from
the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer
Note: The basic setting (index i001) of the unit is used in practice for the parameterization as 12-pulse master
(with the appropriate source wiring for the ON command (P554, P555) and other external control
commands), and the reserve setting (index i002) is used to operate the unit as a stand-alone unit with user
control on-site via the OP1S or PMU.

Connection 06.01
♦ Parameterizing a unit as a 12-pulse slave (see Section 3.8.3)

Using P077 = 5 or 6, almost all settings required for the parameterization as a 12-pulse slave can be carried
out automatically (see Chapter 4.3.9.1). Meaning of P077 = 5 or 6:
P077= 5: Basic setting (index i001): 12-pulse slave (all control is carried out via the master)
Reserve setting (index i002): stand-alone unit with operator control via PMU
P077= 6: Basic setting (index i001): 12-pulse slave (all control is carried out via the master)
Reserve setting (index i002): stand-alone unit with operator control via OP1S
Note: When the reserve setting is selected, the unit operates as a stand-alone unit with on-site operator
control. Changeover between the basic and reserve settings takes place via binary input 5 (P590=1005), but
the reserve setting can be set permanently via P590= 1.
Procedure for carrying out the P077-dependent factory setting (see Section 4.3.9.1):
• Set P051= 3 (expert mode)
• Set P052= 2 (Select "Initialize" function (set MLFB), so that P077 can be modified)
• Set P077= 5 or 6 (Select the required P077-dependent parameter setting)
• Set P052= 0 and press the key (terminate the "initialize" function)
• Set P052= 1 (select the function "Generate manufacturer setting"; when the key is pressed, all
parameters are reset to their factory setting or to the P077-dependent value)
If only those parameter values that are dependent on P077 are required to be changed and all other
parameters should remain unchanged, the following procedure is necessary:
• Set P051= 3 (expert mode)
• Set P052= 2 (select "Initialize" function (set MLFB))
• Note P070 and set P070= 0
• Set P077= 5 or 6 (select the required P077-dependent parameter setting)
• Set P052= 0 and press the key (read in the parameter values dependent on P077)
• Move the F060 error message into the "background" by pressing +<H>
• Set P052= 2 (select "Initialize" function (set MLFB) again)
• P070= noted value (restore MLFB)
• P052= 0 and press the key (MLFB is read in and the dependent parameters P071, P075 and P076
are set)
• Move the F060 error message into the "foreground" again by pressing +<T>, and reset by pressing
the key
Additional parameter settings for the 12-pulse slave:

• P051= 3 (expert mode)
• P688 = 1 (Peer-to-Peer protocol)
• Switch off earth short-circuit test (P354 = 0), when the unit is supplied from an unearthed supply, e.g. from
the delta winding of the 12-pulse transformer
• For factory settings in accordance with P077= 5 or 6, binary input 1 is a source for "No external fault 1"
and binary input 2 is a source for "No external warning 1". If this is not required, e.g. in the case of open
terminals, P575 = 1 and P588 = 1 must be set.

06.01 Connection
♦ Circuit identification:
Circuit identification should be carried out successively on the 12-pulse master and on the 12-pulse slave.
P052= 21 must be set on each unit for this purpose, and the switch-on command for the 12-pulse slave
comes from the 12-pulse master (the control word wiring ensures that the partner unit, in each case, does not
carry current or is held in the operating state r000= "--".
• Circuit identification procedure for 12-pulse master:
Set P052= 21 on the 12-pulse master unit, switch on ⇒ circuit identification is carried out on the 12-pulse
master
• Circuit identification procedure for 12-pulse slave:

Set P052= 21 on the 12-pulse slave unit, switch on the 12-pulse master unit ⇒ circuit identification is
carried out on the 12-pulse slave.
Note: If circuit identification is carried out with the basic settings selected (operation as a 12-pulse slave,
all control is from the 12-pulse master), the switch-on command must come from the 12-pulse master and
the power terminals of the 12-pulse master unit must be connected to the supply voltage.
Note: When the reserve setting is selected on the 12-pulse slave unit (with appropriate parameterization
of index i002 of the "Source selection parameters" P554, P555, ...) it is also possible to issue the switch-
on command for circuit identification on the slave unit on-site via the PMU or OP1S.
♦ Setting additional functions:

If required, activate the "auto restart" (via P366= 2) on the master and on the slave unit. This will be effective
in the event of failure of the electronics supply voltage provided that the Peer-to-Peer telegram failure
monitoring time has been switched off via P687.i003= 0.
3.8.6 Redundancy mode
If both common rectifiers are rated such that each separate unit is capable of carrying the full load current,
the following possibilities are available with respect to redundant operation:
• Uninterrupted changeover of the 12-pulse master unit to stand-alone 6-pulse mode in the event of
failure of the 12-pulse slave unit during 12-pulse mode:
If the 12-pulse master is required to continue to run in "normal" stand-alone 6-pulse mode in the event of
failure of the 12-pulse slave unit without interruption, "External fault 3" must not be "wired" to the Peer-to-Peer
interface, but instead the parameterization P573.i001 (or i002) = 1 is required on the 12-pulse master. If the
master unit is also required to continue to run without an interruption in the event of failure of the Peer-to-
Peer interface cable, the Peer-to-Peer telegram failure monitoring time also has to be switched off via
P687.i003= 0 on the master.
• Reconnection of the 12-pulse slave unit during operation of the master:

If (12-pulse) operation of a 12-pulse slave unit is required to be reinstated following an interruption of the
Peer-to-Peer interface cable without error message and during (stand-alone 6-pulse) operation of the master
unit, the Peer-to-Peer telegram failure monitoring time also has to be switched off via P687.i003= 0 on the
12-pulse slave unit.
• Changeover of the 12-pulse slave unit to stand-alone 6-pulse mode in the event of failure of the 12-
pulse master unit:
Bei Ausfall des Master-Gerätes während des 12-Puls-Betriebes ist ein fast unterbrechungsfreies Umschalten
In the event of failure of the master unit during 12-pulse mode, it is possible for the 12-pulse slave unit to
change over to stand-alone 6-pulse mode almost without interruption, because all external control commands
that are wired to the terminals of the master unit (e.g. ON command) are also carried to the terminals of the
12-pulse slave unit. Externally implemented logic must ensure that in the event of failure of the master unit,
the 12-pulse slave is switched from the basic to the reserve setting. The 12-pulse slave must be
parameterized appropriately in the reserve setting to facilitate stand-alone 6-pulse mode with external control.
The Peer-to-Peer telegram failure monitoring time also has to be switched off via P687.i003= 0 in this case.

Connection 06.01
Note:
With the parameterization P687.i003 = 0 AND P681.i001 = 599, in the event of telegram failure, bits 3 and 6
of the first SST2 Peer-to-Peer receive data (i.e. the control/status word for 12-pulse mode sent from the
partner unit) are set to 0.
3.8.7 RS485 interface cable for the Peer-to-Peer link on SST2
The RS485 interface cable required for the serial Peer-to-Peer link on SST2 is in the form of a four-wire
connection.
A screened 4-core cable must be connected at the screw terminals of the 5-pole plug of terminal block -X117 on
submodule A2 (C98043-A1690). Submodule A2 is fitted to the CUR A10 electronics module (see Section 9.6).
The 4-core cable is not included in the scope of delivery.
12-pulse master 12-pulse slave

A2 A2
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
M M
5 5
X117 X117
Figure 3.17 Connecting cable for "Peer-to-Peer" communication on SST2 (between the terminals of the A2 submodule (C98043-A1690))

06.01 Start-Up
4 Start-Up
4.1 Introduction and handling start-up
WARNING
Despite disconnecting the power terminals from the supply, voltage may still be
present on terminal X19 due to the external fan supply.
4.1.1 Handling the start-up instructions
NOTE
♦ Section 4.2 First start-up:
First start-up of the common rectifier
♦ Section 4.3 Start-up aids:
Index-type reference for start-up and use of the common rectifier, which only has to be used if actually
required!
♦ Section 4.4 Function diagrams:
Graphical overview of the setpoint channel, open-loop/closed-loop control, analog inputs/outputs, and the
common rectifier data sets
4.1.2 General explanation of the terminology and functional scope of the common rectifier
NOTE
The software used for the power supply unit is identical to that used for the power supply units and
regenerative power supply units of equipment series 6SE70.
The functional difference between power supply units and combined power supply and regenerative units is
defined by means of the parameter P070.
Any remarks concerning "regeneration" in these operating instructions (e.g. concerning control word 1) should
be ignored.
Abbreviations:
♦ Abbreviations used: Refer to Section 15 "Information, notes"
Mode and automatic control variants of the common rectifier:
♦ "Function block diagrams: Open and closed-loop control": see Section 4.4
♦ Application: Power supply of the variable-voltage DC link of SIMOVERT converters of the

6SE70 series

Start-Up 06.01
♦ Closed-loop control variant:

a) Parallel connection (see Section 3.7)
The output current can be increased by connecting up to 2 "parallel units of identical rated
current in parallel with the power section of a common rectifier of size K ("basic unit"). The
"basic unit" controls the DC-link voltage. The firing pulses of the basis unit are transmitted to
the parallel unit(s) via ribbon cable. A parallel unit does not contain a CUR electronic module.
When connected in parallel, the load current must be reduced by 10 % with respect to the
total rated current.
Due to the use of identical power sections, commutating reactors as well as identical cable
lengths for connection to the mains supply, an almost symmetrical division of current
between the "basic unit" and the "parallel unit(s)" can be ensured.
b) 12-pulse mode (see Section 3.8)
Two common rectifiers are connected in parallel on the output side and fed on the line side
with galvanically isolated AC supplies, each displaced by 30 degrees. A common rectifier
controls the DC-link voltage and supplies a second common rectifier with the current
setpoint. The second common rectifier that is linked to the first via the SST2 serial interface
(RS485 interface option) with peer-to-peer protocol only becomes a "12-pulse slave" after
parameterization.
12-pulse mode is used to reduce the harmonic loading on the system and to increase the
performance for high-power common rectifiers.
"Process data":
♦ "Process data" are commands and setpoints from "outside" fed into the common rectifier, as
well as signals and actual values which are output from the common rectifier
Process data
Sources Destinations
- Binary inputs BE - Binary outputs BA
(terminals) (terminals)
- Parameterizing unit (PMU) Commands Messages - Parameterizing unit (PMU)
- Operator control panel (OP) "Control Word" "status word" - Operator control panel (OP)
- Serial interfaces - Serial interfaces
(SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB) e.g.: "ON command" Setpoint e.g.: "fault (SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB)
chanal
Op./cl-loop
control
- Analog outputs AA
(terminals)
- Serial interfaces - Parameterizing unit (PMU)
Setpoints Actual values
(SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB) - Operator control panel (OP)
- Serial interfaces
Only: Id setpoint in e.g. output current (SST1, SST2, SCB, CB, TB)
12-pulse operation
Common Rectifier

06.01 Start-Up
"Indexed" parameters:
♦ Several parameter values are assigned to one parameter number, which can be accessed via
the separate indices (in brief: i001, i002, etc.).
The meaning of the indices of the respective parameter (parameter number) is explained in the
parameter list in Chapter 5.
Index 1
Example:
P683 i001 = 0 Bus address for serial interface SST1 (CUR)
Index 2
i002 = 2 Bus address for serial interface on the SCB module
"Data sets":
♦ "Indexed" parameters can be sub-divided according to data sets.

A data set comprises a group of several parameter values with the same index. Depending on
the status of certain control word bits, a specific data record is accessed
(see the function diagram for "selecting the data sets " in Section 4.4).
There are two types of data set:
♦ Data sets for basic/reserve setting (B/R) can be selected via control word 2/bit 30
Associated source selection parameter: P590
Affected parameters: P486, P554 to P557, P561, P565 to P569, P571 to P575,
P578, P579, P583 and P586 to P589
e.g. for changing over between manual and automatic operation
♦ 4 changeover reserve data sets (RDS) 1, 2, 3 or 4, selectable via the bit combination
in control word 2/bits 18 and 19.
Associated source selection parameters: P578, P579
Affected parameters: P140 to P144, P160, P161, P310 to P320, P329, P408,
P517, P518, P773 to P777
Used, e.g. for alternating operation of different inverter types on one common
rectifier

Start-Up 06.01
4.2 Initial start-up

4.2.1 Preparatory measures
- Transporting, unpacking, assembling: refer to Section 2

- Connecting-up: Refer to Section 3
- Read "Introduction and handling the start-up instructions": Section 4.1
- Forming: If the inverter(s) connected have been switched off continuously or not connected for more than a
year, is/their link capacitors must be formed (see Section 4.3.9.6).
- Connect-up the supply and electronics power supply of the converter with the front panel closed.
The common rectifier is supplied with the "factory setting" (refer to Section 5 "Parameter list", column 4)
and access stage 2 (standard mode). That means:
- The settings of the common rectifier data correspond to the unit type according to the MLFB
(i.e. converter already initialized).
When supplied, the converter is controlled and parameterized by the parameterizing unit (PMU) located on the
front side of the converter.
Displays:
Statuses
faults, alarms,
parameter numbers,
index numbers,
parameter values
Raise/lower
to select:
Switch-on
Switch-off Parameters
Indices
Fault acknowledgement and P Parameter values
changeover between:
Parameter number
Parameter index
Parameter value
A detailed description of the displays as well as the parameterizing and operator control possibilities of the
common rectifier via the PMU, is provided in Section 6 "operator control".
Parameterization is realized according to Sections 4.2.2 and 4.2.3
NOTE
It is possible to jump into the appropriate sequence step (in the following flow diagrams) if incorrect entries
have been made, taking into account the access stage (P051) and a function selection (P052) which may be
required.
It is recommended that the following parameters and function steps after the jump-in position are re-checked
and executed due to the background calculations !
NOTE
To avoid oscillating of the link voltage in regenerative mode, it is advisable to set parameter P302 of the
SIMOVERT Master Drives FC, VC, SC (time constant for filtering the link voltage) to the value 3.

06.01 Start-Up
4.2.2 Parameterization "Standard application"
P050 = Language (only important when an OP1S is in use; see Section 9.4):
0: German, 1: English, 2: Spanish, 3: French, 4: Italian
P051 = 2 Access stage "Standard mode“
P053 = Parameterization enable

e.g. with P053=6, the parameters from the parameterization unit (PMU) and
from serial interface 1 of the basic unit (SST1- and therefore also from the
optional user-friendly operator panel OP1S) can be modified.
Commands yes
via OP1S? Operator control
In order to avoid having to wait until the link circuit voltage drops below 20%
no
P554 = 2001 before switching off, set the parameter P554 = P555.
If the unit is to be switched on and off via the optional user-friendly operator
panel OP1S:
P555 = 2001 P554=2001 Source for control command "ON/OFF1"
P555=2001 Source for control command "OFF2"
P052 = 5 Drive setting
P071 = Supply voltage [V]

Value of the rated voltage at the input bridge
Idle time yes

of converter
>1year
no Forming the DC link (if necessary, see Section 4.3.9.6)

- The common rectifier must be in status o009 less
P408 = (give SWITCH ON command)
- Set P408 (forming time: 1.0 to 600.0 minute)
P052 = 20 - Select function (P052 = 20)
- Press P key on the PMU
P key - Press the I key on the PMU
Switch-on - The DC link is formed
- When forming is completed, the operating status display appears
Forming
r000 ≤ o009
Wait to (see r006)

Ud<50V

Start-Up 06.01
Circuit identification
(see Section 4.3.9.7)
P052 = 21 - The common rectifier must be in operating state o009 or less

r949.i009 = ? (give SWITCH OFF command!)
P key - Select circuit identification (P052 = 21)
- Press the P key on the PMU
Switch-on r000 ≤ o009
- Switch on: Press the I key on the PMU
- Circuit identification takes place (takes about 10 s)
Identification Acknowledge - Following circuit identification, the operating display is activated.
- If an error occurs during circuit identification, the identification
process must be repeated (error value r949 assigned to error
yes
memory r947 can provide more information on the cause of error
Eliminate
Fault message (if the error in index i009 has been reset) see Sections 5.16 and
cause of fault 7.1)
no
r000 ≤ o009
Documenting the settings
P052 = 22 - Select the "Display modified parameters“ function (P052 = 22).

(see Section 4.3.9.8 "Display modified parameters“)
Note: Function can only be used with operator control via the
Logbook PMU
- Enter the values of the modified (i.e. system-specific) parameters
in the logbook (Chapter 12)
P52 = 0 - Select the "Return" function (P052 = 0)
Ready
DC link voltage smoothing
- By parameterizing P302=3 (time constant for smoothing the DC
link voltage) on the connected SIMOVERT Master Drive FC the
dynamic behavior of the closed-loop control of the DC link
voltage can be improved.

06.01 Start-Up
4.2.3 Parameterization for "Expert application"

Parameterization can be simplified by selecting an appropriate factory setting via parameter P077 using special
functions such as 12-pulse mode with two commom rectifiers coupled via a peer-to-peer link. In this case, this is
carried out by selecting the function "Generate factory setting" as described in Section 4.3.9.1 with P077≠0.
Then the parameterization shown in the following diagram can be carried out.
In all other cases, the following parameterization is started immediately.
P050 = Language (only important when an OP1S is in use; see Section 9.4):
0: German, 1: English, 2: Spanish, 3: French, 4: Italian
P051 = 3 Access stage "Expert mode“
P053 = Parameterization enable

e.g. with P053=6, the parameters from the parameterization unit (PMU)
and from serial interface 1 of the basic unit (SST1- and therefore also from
yes the optional user-friendly operator panel OP1S) can be modified
Commands
via OP1S?
Operator control
no
P554 = 2001 In order to avoid having to wait until the link circuit voltage drops below
20% before switching off, set the parameter P554 = P555.
If the unit is to be switched on and off via the optional user-friendly operator
P555 = 2001 panel OP1S:
P554=2001 Source for control command "ON/OFF1"
P555=2001 Source for control command "OFF2"
P052 = 5 Drive setting
Supply voltage [V]

P071 =
Value of the rated voltage at the rectifier bridge
P076 = Value of the rated voltage at the rectifier bridge

P076 = 00x No power section connected in parallel
P160 = 01x 1 common rectifier parallel unit connected in parallel with
the basic unit
02x 2 common rectifier parallel units connected in parallel with
Idle time the basic unit
yes
of converter (also see Section 3.7 and Section 5, P076)
>1year
Current limits:
no
P408 =
P160 = Max. supply current (in % P075 rated current of common
rectifier (factory setting: +150% only briefly available)
P052 = 20
Forming the DC link (if necessary; see Section 4.3.9.6)
P key - The common rectifier must be in status o009 or less
Switch-on (give SWITCH OFF command!).
- Set P408 (forming time: 1.0 to 600.0 minutes).
- Select function (P052 = 20)
Forming - Press the P key on the PMU
- Forming of the DC link takes place
r000 ≤ o009
- Following the forming process, the status display is activated.
Wait to (see r006)

Ud<50V

Start-Up 06.01
Circuit identification
(see Section 4.3.9.7)
P052 = 21 r949.i009 = ? - The common rectifier must be in operating state o009 or less
P key (give SWITCH OFF command!).
- Select circuit identification (P052 = 21).
Switch-on r000 ≤ o009 - Press the P key on the PMU
- Circuit identification takes place (takes about 10 s)
Identification Acknowledge
- Following circuit identification, the operating display is activated.
- If an error occurs during circuit identification, the identification
process must be repeated (error value r949 assigned to error
yes Eliminate memory r947 can provide more information on the cause of error
Fault message
cause of fault (if the error in index i009 has been reset) see Sections 5.16 and
7.1)
no
r000 ≤ o009 Change factory setting for: Command and setpoint sources,
Destinations for signals and actual
values
Process data: refer to Section 4.3.1
Change yes - Control word (commands) / status word (messages)
process data
connection? - Setpoint/actual values
Connect Possible process data sources/destinations:

no
process data (refer to Sections 4.3.2 to 4.3.6)
- Binary inputs, binary outputs
- Analog inputs
- Serial interface in the basic unit (SST1, SST2)
(SST2 only for optional RS485 interface PTP1)
- Option boards (SCB, CB, TB)
Functions yes Simple applications: refer to Section 4.2.5
required?
software Possible functions:
no Parametrize WEA (automatic restart)
functions Parameterize functions:
Refer to Section 4.3.10 "Functions" and Section 5 "Parameter list"
Documenting the settings

P052 = 22 - Select the "Display modified parameters“ function (P052 = 22)
(see Section 4.3.9.8 "Display modified parameters“)
Note: Function can only be used with operator control via the
Logbook PMU
- Enter the values of the modified (i.e. system-specific) parameters
P52 = 0 in the logbook (Chapter 12)
- Select the "Return" function (P052 = 0)
Ready
DC link voltage smoothing
- By parameterizing P302=3 (time constant for smoothing the DC
link voltage) on the connected SIMOVERT Master Drive FC the
dynamic behavior of the closed-loop control of the DC link
voltage can be improved.

06.01 Start-Up
4.2.5 Simple application examples for connecting process data with connection assignment
Connecting-up: Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip"
Factory setting:
Switch-on/off via the PMU, messages and actual values via the terminal strip.
Terminal strip only operational if binary input 5 (BE5) is energized (high signal level corresponds to "reserve").
CUR PMU
-X104/19 BA2 Floating contact P603.1 = 1002 ON/OFF1 P554.1 = 1010

-X104/20 BA2 Fault
-X101/6 P24
-X101/9 BE1 ON/OFF1 P554.2 = 1001
-X101/10 BE2 OFF2 (pulse inhibit) P555.2 = 1002
-X101/11 BE3 Acknowledge P565.2 = 1003
-X101/12 BE4
Basic/reserve P590 = 1005
-X101/13 BE5
(activates above commands)
-X102/15 AAM
-X102/14 AA Actual Ud value P655.1 = 37
Manual/automatic operation:
Automatic operation (BE5 high signal level): Command input from the automation unit via serial interface
(SST1), the monitoring of external faults via a terminal strip also
possible.
Manual operation (BE5 low signal level): Command input via the terminal strip.
CUR SST1 SST Automation unit
ON/OFF1 P554.2 = 2001

Acknowledge P565.2 = 2001
Floating contact P602.1 = 1002

-X104/19 BA2
Operation
-X104/20 BA2
-X101/6 P24 ON/OFF1 P554.1 = 1001

-X101/9 BE1
-X101/10 BE2 Acknowledge P565.1 = 1003
-X101/11 BE3 Fault external 1 P575.1 = 1004 P575.2 = 1004 (always activ)
-X101/12 BE4 Basic/reserve P590 = 1005
-X101/13 BE5
-X102/15 AAM
-X102/14 AA Actual Ud value P655 = 37

Start-Up 06.01
4.3 Start-up aids

4.3.1 Process data
Process data are commands and setpoints which are entered into the common rectifier from "outside" as well as
signals and actual values which the common rectifier outputs.
4.3.1.1 Control word (control word 1 and control word 2)

Control/status word for 12-pulse mode, see Section 3.8
4.3.1.1.1 Introduction and application example
The two control words 1 (bits 0 to 15) and 2 (bits 16 to 31) output commands and external signals (messages) to
the common rectifier.
Their status can be read-out via parameter r550 or r967 (control 1) and r551 (control word 2).
An overview is provided in Section 4.3.1.1.2 "Overview of the control word".
The significance of the possible commands and signals, entered externally, is described in Section 4.3.1.1.7
"Significance of the control word commands".
Every control word bit is assigned a selection parameter, which defines from which source(s) this bit can be
changed (refer to Section 4.3.1.1.2, right-hand column).
The selection parameters for the sources are, with the exception of P590 (source selection for control word bit
30 "basic/reserve setting") and P591 (source selection for control word bit 31 "Main contactor checkback signal")
are indexed 2x as follows:
Index i001 Basic setting
i002 Reserve setting
An overview of possible sources, which are assigned fixed values (0-6005, non-consecutively), are provided in
Section 4.3.1.1.3 to 4.3.1.1.6 "Selecting the source for the control word".
In this overview, values 0 and 1 are an exception; sources are not selected with these values, but the bits are set
permanently to 0 (LOW) or 1 (HIGH) (also refer to select parameters P554 to P591 in Section 5 "parameter list").
NOTE
The control word commands "OFF2" (bit1) and "Acknowledge" (bit7) are always simultaneously effective from
3 sources (can be parameterized) !
"Acknowledge" (bit7) is also always effective from the PMU !
NOTICE
If the "On" command (bit 0) is connected to a serial interface (SST1, CB/TB, SCB-SST), then the following
must be observed for safety-related reasons:
Additionally, an "OFF2" command must be parameterized at the terminal strip/PMU, as otherwise the converter
cannot be shutdown with a defined command, when communications fail!
NOTE
In order to avoid having to wait until the link circuit voltage drops below 20% of 1.35*P071 before execution of
a switching-off command, set the parameter P554.i001 = P555.i001 and P554.i002 = P555.i002.

06.01 Start-Up
WARNING
When making any modifications to control or other wiring, make absolutely sure that no
dangerous situations can arise!
Example:
If a terminal at logic H potential is programmed as the source for the ON/OFF1 command,
the common rectifier will enter the "Run" ("R") state when the P key is pressed (activates
the value set!).
Conversely, a common rectifier that is in the "R" state will enter the "Ready" ("B") state if
the terminal is at logic L potential.
Typical application:
Control word bit 0 1 2 3 ... ... 31
0: no main con. chckbk.

1: Main con. chckbk.
1: Op. enable
0: Op. inhibit
1: Op. cond.
Meaning
0: OFF1
0: OFF2
1: ON
P554 P555 P561 P... P... P591

Select. P556
parameter P557
Basic set. i001= i001= i001= i001= i001=

Reserve set. i002= i002= i002= i002= i002=
Changeover using
control word bit 30
P590
Value 0000 0001 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1010 2001 2004 3001 to 4504 6001 to 6005
CUR, BE1
CUR, BE2
CUR, BE3
CUR, BE4
CUR, BE5
Constant-
Constant-
word 1 to
value = 0
value = 1
(Peer-to-
-X101:10
-X101:11
-X101:12
-X101:13
(Word1)
(Word4)
-X101:9
Source
word 5
SST1
SST1
SST1
Options
Peer)
PMU
ON/OFF1: Basic set.: via PMU (keys I/0) Reserve set.: via bin. input 1 of CUR
Op. cond/OFF2: Basic set.: Constant value= 1= always op. cond. Reserve set.: Constant value = 1 = always op.
cond.
NOTE: For OFF2 and OFF3, 3 selection parameters can be assigned differently in the same index!
Op. enable/inhibit: Basic set.: Constant value = 1 = always op. enable. Reserve set.: Constant value = 1 = via serial
interface SST1 of the CUR

Start-Up 06.01
4.3.1.1.2 Overview of the control word (control word 1 and control word 2)
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
PMU Display
"Control word 1" (visualization parameter r550 or r967)
Bit High Low Comments Source
selection
0 ON OFF1 (stop) (Priority OFF 2/1) P554
1 Operating condition OFF2 (electrical) 3 sources simultaneously effective; P555
(Priority OFF 2/1) P556
P557
2 always HIGH
3 Operating condition Inhibit operation Firing pulse enable P561
4 always High
5 always High
6 always High
7 Acknowledge Simultaneously effective from 3 P565
sources and PMU; P566
Positive edge evaluation P567
8 Inching 1 ON Inching 1 OFF Same effect as ON/OFF1 P568 1)
9 Inching 2 ON Inching 2 OFF Same effect as ON/OFF1 P569 1)
10 Control from the PLC No control Only effective via
CB,TB,SST1,SST/SCB
11 Ud reduction requested Ud reduction inactive P571 1)
12 Regenerating enabled Regenerating inhibited not relevant for an E unit P572 1)
13 No fault, external 3 Fault, external 3 P573 1)
14 Motoring Generating not relevant for an E unit P574 1)
15 No fault, external 1 Fault, external 1 P575
31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16
PMU Display
"Control word 2" (visualization parameter r551)
Bit High Low Comments Source
selection
16
17
18 RDS (reserve data set) bit 0 (LSB) Logic operation with bit 19 P578 1)
19 RDS (reserve data set) bit 1 (MSB) Logic operation with bit 18 P579 1)
20
21
22
23 12-pulse mode selected No 12-pulse mode P583 1)
24
25
26 No fault, external 2 Fault, external 2 P586
27 Slave common rectifier Master common rectifier Changeover Ud/Id control P587
28 No alarm, external 1 Alarm, external 1 P588
29 No alarm, external 2 Alarm, external 2 P589
30 Reserve setting for Basic setting for setpoints P590
setpoints and control word and control word
31 HS checkback signal No HS checkback signal
Can only connected at the converter P591
term. strip or SCB
1) This bit has a different meaning for the common rectifier as for the converter

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.1.1.3 Selecting the source for control word 1 (bit 0-7)
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Selection P. basic setting 554.1 555 to 557.1 561.1 565 to 567.1
Selection P. reserve setting 554.2 555 to 557.2 561.2 565 to 567.2
Value Source
0000 Constant value = 0 x x xG/R

0001 Constant value = 1 xG/R xG/
R
1001 CUR, BE1, -X101:9 xR x x x
1002 CUR, BE2, -X101:10 x xR for 555 x x
1003 CUR, BE3, -X101:11 x x x xR for 565
1004 CUR, BE4, -X101:12 x x x x
1005 CUR, BE5, -X101:13 x x x x
1010 PMU xG xG for 555 1)
2001 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) x x x xG/R for 567
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word4
OPTIONS
3001 CB/TB (Word1) x x x x
3004 CB/TB (Word4)
4101 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1,BE1 x x x x
4102 BE2 x x x x
... Consecutively to x x x x
4110 BE10 x x x x
4111 only SCI 2, Slave 1,BE11 x x x x
4112 BE12 x x x x
4116 BE16 x x x x
4201 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 2,BE1 x x x x
4202 BE2 x x x x
4210 BE10 x x x x
4211 only SCI 2, Slave 2,BE11 x x x x
4212 BE12 x x x x
4216 BE16 x x x x
4501 SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word1 x x x x
4504 SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word4
6001 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1 x x x x
6005 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5 x x x x
x: Value can be assigned for the selection parameters (BE can only be assigned once in the same index of all
selection parameters!)
1) Value 1010 cannot be set, but reset is always possible from PMU.
Factory setting: xG: for basic setting with P077=0

xR: for reserve setting with P077=0

Start-Up 06.01
Bit 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Selection P. basic setting 568.1 569.1 571.1 572.1 573.1 574.1 575.1
Selection P. reserve setting 568.2 569.2 571.2 572.2 573.2 574.2 575.2
Value Source
0000 Constant value = 0 xG/R xG/R xG/R x xG/R

0001 Constant value = 1 x xG/R xG/R xG/R
1001 CUR, BE1, -X101:9 x x x x x x x
1002 CUR, BE2, -X101:10 x x x x x x x
1003 CUR, BE3, -X101:11 x x x x x x x
1004 CUR, BE4, -X101:12 x x x x x x x
1005 CUR, BE5, -X101:23 x x x x x x x
1010 PMU
2001 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) x x x x x x x
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word4
OPTIONS
3001 CB/TB (Word1) x x x x x x x
3004 CB/TB (Word4)
4101 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1,BE1 x x x x x x x
4102 BE2 x x x x x x x
... Consecutively to x x x x x x x
4110 BE10 x x x x x x x
4111 only SCI 2, Slave 1,BE11 x x x x x x x
4112 BE12 x x x x x x x
4116 BE16 x x x x x x x
4201 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 2,BE1 x x x x x x x
4202 BE2 x x x x x x x
4210 BE10 x x x x x x x
4211 only SCI 2, Slave 2,BE11 x x x x x x x
4212 BE12 x x x x x x x
4216 BE16 x x x x x x x
4501 SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word1 x x x x x x x
6001 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1 x x x x x x x
6005 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5 x x x x x x x
x: Value can be assigned for the selection parameters


06.01 Start-Up
Bit 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Selection P. basic setting 578.1 579.1 583.1
Selection P. reserve setting 578.2 579.2 583.2
Value Source
0000 Constant value = 0 xG/R xG/R xG/R

0001 Constant value = 1 x x x
1001 CUR, BE1, -X101:9 x x x
1002 CUR, BE2, -X101:10 x x x
1003 CUR, BE3, -X101:11 x x x
1004 CUR, BE4, -X101:12 x x x
1005 CUR, BE5, -X101:13 x x x
1010 PMU
2001 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) x x x
Word4
OPTIONS
3001 CB/TB (Word1)
3004 CB/TB (Word4) x x x
4101 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1, BE1 x x x
4102 BE2 x x x
... Consecutively to x x x
4110 BE10 x x x
4111 only SCI 2, Slave 1, BE11 x x x
4112 BE12 x x x
4116 BE16 x x x
4201 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 2, BE1 x x x
4202 BE2 x x x
4210 BE10 x x x
4211 only SCI 2, Slave 2, BE11 x x x
4212 BE12 x x x
4216 BE16 x x x
4504 SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word4 x x x
6001 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1 x x x
6005 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5 x x x


Start-Up 06.01
Bit 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Selection P. basic setting 586.1 587.1 588.1 589.1 590 591
Selection P. reserve setting 586.2 587.2 588.2 589.2 590 591
Value Source
0000 Constant value = 0 xG/R x

0001 Constant value = 1 xG/R x xG/R xG/R x X
1001 CUR, BE1, -X101:9 x x x x x x
1002 CUR, BE2, -X101:10 x x x x x x
1003 CUR, BE3, -X101:11 x x x x x x
1004 CUR, BE4, -X101:12 x x x x x x
1005 CUR, BE5, -X101:13 x x x x X x
1010 PMU
2001 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5)
Word1
2004 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) x x x x x
Word4
OPTIONS
3001 CB/TB, Word1
3004 CB/TB, Word4 x x x x x
4101 SCI 1 and 2, Slave 1,BE1 x x x x x x
4102 BE2 x x x x x x
... Consecutively to x x x x x x
4110 BE10 x x x x x x
4111 only SCI 2, Slave 1,BE11 x x x x x x
4112 BE12 x x x x x x
4116 BE16 x x x x x x
4201 SCI 1 and 2,Slave 2,BE1 x x x x x x
4202 BE2 x x x x x x
4210 BE10 x x x x x x
4211 only SCI 2, Slave 2,BE11 x x x x x x
4212 BE12 x x x x x x
4216 BE16 x x x x x x
4504 SCB-SST (USS /Peer-t-Peer) Word4 x x x x x
6001 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 1 x x x x x
... Consecutively to x x x x x
6005 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Word 5 x x x x x
Factory setting: X: for P590 / P591

xG: for basic setting with P077=0

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.1.1.7 Significance of control word (1 and 2) commands
The status of the rectifier/regenerating unit can be read in the operating display r000: e.g. READY-TO-SWITCH-
ON r000=009
The function sequences are described in the sequence in which they are realized.
Bit 0: ↑ "ON")
ON command (↑
The command is executed with a positive edge change from L to H (L → H) only in the READY-TO-SWITCH-ON
(009).
After the command has been accepted:
♦ Changeover to the status WAIT FOR LINE VOLTAGE (010)
The main contactor is closed.
♦ Changeover to the status READY STATUS(011)
♦ Changeover to the status TEST PHASE (012)
Takes place only if thyristor or ground-fault test (P353,P354) selected.
♦ Changeover to the RUN status(014)
Pre-charging is carried out, followed by normal operation.
Bit 0: OFF1 command (L "OFF1")

The OFF1 command (stop) is executed with an L signal.
♦ The DC link discharges itself until the link circuit voltage has fallen to 20% of 1.35*P071.
The firing pulses are then inhibited and the main contactor (if installed) drops out.
If the OFF1 command is removed again (ON command) during the discharge process, the latter is
interrupted and changeover is made again to the RUN (014) status.
♦ If the rectifier/regenerating unit is in the READY status, the firing pulses are disabled and the main contact, if
installed, drops out.
♦ If there is no OFF2 command:
Changeover to the READY TO SWITCH ON status (009)
Bit 1: OFF2 command (L "OFF2")

The OFF2 command (electrical) is realized with an L signal.
♦ The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contact drops out
♦ Changeover into the SWITCH-ON INHIBIT status(008)
NOTE
The OFF2 command is simultaneously effective from three sources (P555, P556 and P557)!
NOTE
Priority of the OFF commands OFF2 > OFF1

Start-Up 06.01
Bit 3: Run enable command (H "Run enable")

The RUN ENABLE command (firing pulse enable) is implemented with an H signal.
♦ If the READY status (011) still applies.
Changeover to the RUN status (014); the firing pulses are enabled and the voltage setpoint is approached
over the pre-charging ramp.
Bit 3: Run inhibit command (L "Run inhibit")

The RUN INHIBIT command (firing pulses disabled) is implemented with an L signal.
♦ If the RUN status (014) applies:
Changeover to the READY status (01); the firing pulses are inhibited.
Bit 4 to 6: reserved
Bit 7: ↑ "Acknowledge")
Acknowledge command (↑
The command is executed with a positive edge change from L to H (L → H) only in the FAULT status (007).
♦ All actual faults are deleted after having been previously transferred into the diagnostics memory
♦ If no faults are present:
The drive changes into the status SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008)
♦ If actual faults are present:
The drive remains in the FAULT status (007).
NOTE
The acknowledge command is simultaneously effective from three sources (P565, P566 and P567) and
always from the PMU!
Bit 8: ↑ "Inching 1 ON")

Inching 1 ON command (↑
status (009).
After the command has been accepted
♦ an ON command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).
Bit 8: Inching 1 OFF command (L "Inching 1 OFF")

The command is executed with an L signal.
♦ An OFF 1 command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).
Bit 9: ↑ "Inching 2 ON")

Inching 2 ON command (↑
status (009).
♦ an ON command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).

06.01 Start-Up
Bit 9: Inching 2 OFF command (L "Inching 2 OFF")

♦ An OFF 1 command is automatically executed (description, refer to control word bit 0).
Bit 10: Control from the PLC command (H "Control from the PLC")
The command is executed with an H signal
Process data PZD (control word, setpoints) originating from a PLC which were sent via the SST1 interface of
CU1, the CB/TB interface (option) and the SST/SCB interface (option), are only evaluated if the command was
accepted.
♦ If several interfaces are operational, only the process data of the interfaces are evaluated, which transmit the
H signal.
♦ For an L signal, the last values are retained in the appropriate dual port RAM of the interface.
An H signal appears in the visualization parameter r550 "control word 1", if one of the interfaces transmits an H
signal!
Bit 11: Ud reduction command (H "Ud reduction requested")

The command is executed with an H signal.
♦ The DC link voltage setpoint drops to the value set with P318:
P318
Setpo int = 1.35 *USupply,rectifier *
100 .00%
If the value of P330 is even, Ud setpoint lowering takes place abruptly. If it is odd, the setpoint is ramped
down according to the discharge time in P330.
♦ The DC link should now discharge.

♦ When the DC link voltage drops below the following threshold value
P318 2%
1.35 *U Supply,rectifier *100.00% + 100% *1.35 *P071
the message "Ud reduced" (status word 1, bit 13) is issued.
♦ The appearance of a trailing edge of the Ud reduction command causes the output of the ramp-up/return
element (precharging time P329) to be set to the current value of DC link voltage so that the DC link voltage
setpoint can ramp up again from this value.
♦ The L signal of the Ud reduction command causes the "Ud reduced" message (status word 1, bit 13) to be
held low (regardless of the DC link voltage level)

Start-Up 06.01
Bit 12: Regenerating enable command (H "Regenerating enable")

This command is of no significance in the case of a power supply unit.
Bit 12: Regenerating inhibit command (L "Regenerating inhibit")

This command is of no significance in the case of a power supply unit.
Bit 13: Fault, external 3 command (L "Fault, external 3")

♦ Changeover to the FAULT status (007) (fault F038)
The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contactor, if installed, drops out (see also Chapter 7 ""Faults and
Warnings").
Bit 14: Power direction command (H " Motoring "; L " Generating ")
This command is used to specify the feed direction.
If the signal is High, the infeed bridge may carry current, if Low it may not.

The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contactor, if installed, drops out.(see also Chapter 7 ""Faults and
Warnings")
Bit 16 and 17: reserved
Bit 18: Reserve data set RDS bit 0 (LSB) command

In conjunction with bit 19 "RDS bit 1", this command permits changeover between four possible data sets (see
"Data sets" in Section 4.1.2 and "Selecting the data sets" in Section 4.4).
NOTE
The values in the data sets must be meaningful. This is the case, for example, when current identification (see
Section 4.3.9.7) has been carried out for the currently selected reserve data set or when a valid data set has
been copied using copy parameters (see P055 in Section 5.3). Otherwise errors will be reported.

♦ The parameter settings of the corresponding data set in the closed/open-loop control are activated.
Bit 19: Reserve data set RDS bit 1 (MSB) command

In conjunction with bit 18 "RDS bit 0", this command permits switches over between four possible data sets (see
bit 18).
Bits 20 to 22: reserved
Bit 23: 12-pulse mode selection command (H "12-pulse mode is selected")

The command is executed with an H signal and causes a change in operational behavior from that of a single
unit (i.e. a "normal" single unit becomes a 12-pulse master or a 12-pulse slave depending on parameter P587 or
control word bit 27). See Section 3.8.4 for further details.

06.01 Start-Up
Bits 24 and 25: reserved

The command is recognized with an L signal and does not become active until the pre-charging time (P329) and
an additional time delay of 300 ms has elapsed when the operating mode RUN is active. During formation
(P052=20) or circuit identification (P052=21), the command is ineffective.
The firing pulses are inhibited and the main contactor, if installed, drops out (see also Chapter 7 "Faults and
Warnings").
Bit 27: Master/slave changeover (H "Slave common rectifier"/L "Master common rectifier ")
The command switches between slave and master mode.
Slave common rectifier: The closed-loop control operates with an external DC link current setpoint
Even when a thyristor test is selected (P353=1, 2 or 3) if Ud > 5% it does not wait in
state o012 and the thyristor test is not carried out.
Master common rectifier: The closed-loop control operates with an external DC link current setpoint
Bit 28: Alarm, external 1 command (L "Alarm, external 1")

♦ The operating status is retained. An alarm message (A015) is output (also refer to Section 7 "Fault and Alarm
Messages")
Bit 29: Alarm, external 2 command (L "Alarm, external 2")

♦ The operating status is retained. An alarm message (A015) is output (also refer to Section 7 " Fault and
Alarm Messages ")
Bit 30: Selection, basic/reserve setting command (L "Basic setting / H "Reserve setting")
The command activates the BASIC SETTING with an L signal and the RESERVE SETTING with an H signal
♦ The parameter settings of the basic or reserve setting for the control word itself, the setpoint channel, and the
closed-loop control are activated (see "Data sets" in Section 4.1.2 and "Selecting the data sets" in Section
4.4).
Bit 31: Main contactor checkback signal command (H "Main contactor checkback signal")
This command permits you to include an auxiliary contact of the main contactor in the unit control circuit (an H
signal implies that the main contactor has picked up).
♦ An operating status > o010 is permitted

Start-Up 06.01
4.3.1.2 Status word (status word 1 and status word 2)
4.3.1.2.1 Introduction and application example
Status words 1 (bits 0 to 15) and 2 (bits 16 to 31) issue messages and commands from the common rectifier to
external destinations.
Their particular status can be read-out via parameters r552 or r968 (status word 1) and r553 (status word 2).
An overview is provided in Section 4.3.1.2.2 "Overview of the status word".
The significance of the possible messages and commands to the outside is described in Section 4.3.1.2.4
"Significance of the status word messages".
Each status word bit is assigned a selection parameter, which defines, to which destination this bit is sent (refer
to Section 4.3.1.2.2, right-hand column).
The selection parameters for the destinations are indexed twice as follows:
Index: i001 Selecting a terminal on the CU / PEU board (basic converter)
i002 Selecting a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)
An overview of the possible destinations, which are assigned fixed values, is provided in Section 4.3.1.2.3
"Selecting the destinations for the status word".
NOTE
For the output of faults, alarms and switch-on inhibit of the status word (HIGH active) via the terminal strip,
then these are LOW active at the terminals (binary outputs) (i.e.: the relay drops out)!
This is also true for possible option boards!
Also refer to Section 4.3.3 "Binary outputs"
Example:
Status word bit 0 1 2 3 ... ... 31

0: n.ready to switch-on
1: Ready to switch-on
0: Prech. not active

0: Pulse. inhibit
1: Prech. active
Meaning
0: n. ready
0: no fault
1: Ready
1: Fault
1: Run
Select
parameter P600 P601 P602 P603 P... P... P631
Term. on CUR i001= i001= i001= i001= i001= i001= i001=

Term on SCI 1/2 i002= i002= i002= i002= i002= i002= i002=
Value 0000 1001 1002 0000 4101 ... 4112 4201 ... 4205 ... 4212
-X104:17/18
-X104:19/20
SCI,Slave2
SCI,Slave1
SCI,Slave1
SCI,Slave2
SCI,Slave2
CUR, BA1
CUR, BA2
no dest.
no dest.
Dest.
BA12
BA12
BA1
BA1
BA5
Index 1 Index 2
Terminal on CUR Terminal on SCI 1/2
(Option)
"Run" signal: - at terminal -X104:19/20 of the CUR

- at terminal of the binary output 5 of the SCI (option),which is coded as slave 2

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.1.2.2 Overview of the status word (status word 1 and status word 2)
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
PMU Display
"Status word 1" (visualization parameter r552 or r968)
Bit High Low Comments Dest.
selection
0 Ready-to-switch-on Not ready to switch on P600
1 Ready Not ready P601
2 Run Firing pulses inhibited P602
3 Fault No fault Inverted for terminal strips! P603
4 No OFF 2 OFF2 P604
5 always High
6 Switch-on inhibit No switch-on inhibit Inverted for terminal strips! P606
7 Alarm No alarm Inverted for terminal strips! P607
8 No setpt. act. val. deviation Setpt. act. value deviation Can be parameterized P608
9 PZD control requested always "High"
(for CB,TB,SST1,SST/SCB)
10 Regenerating ready Regenerating not ready P610 1)
11 Fault, undervoltage No undervoltage fault Inverted for terminal strips! P611
12 Main contactor energized Main contactor not Can only be connector for P612
energized terminals CUR or SCI!
13 Ud reduced Ud not reduced P613 1)
14 Motoring Generating not relevant for an E unit P614 1)
15
31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16
PMU Display
"Status word 2" (visualization parameter r553)
Bit High Low Comments Dest.
selection
16
17
18 Current active Current limit not active Inverted for terminal strips! P618 1)
19 Fault, external 1 No fault, external 1 Inverted for terminal strips! P619
20 Fault, external 2 No fault, external 2 Inverted for terminal strips! P620
21 Alarm, external No alarm, external Inverted for terminal strips! P621
22 Alarm i2t power sections No alarm, i2t power section Inverted for terminal strips! P622
23 Fault, overtemp., p.s. No fault, overtemp. p.s. Inverted for terminal strips! P623
24 Alarm, overtemp., p.s. No alarm, overtemp., p.s. Inverted for terminal strips! P624
25
26
27
28
29
30
31 Pre-charging active Pre-charging not active P631
1) The meaning of this bit is different for the common rectifier than for the converter

Start-Up 06.01
4.3.1.2.3 Selecting the destinations for the status word (bits 0 - 31)
For the selection parameters P600 to P631, in which the destination of the appropriate bit can be specified, then
the indices are uniformly assigned as follows:
Index i001 Selecting a terminal on the CUR board (basic converter)

i002 Selecting a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)
Index i001 Selecting a terminal on the CUR board (basic converter)

Value Destination
0000 No destination Factory setting, except P603
1001 CUR, BA1, -X104:17/18,
1002 CUR, BA2, -X104:19/20, Factory setting, for P603
Index i002 Selecting a terminal on the SCI 1/2 board (option)

Value Destination
0000 No destination Factory setting
4101 SCI 1 and 2,Slave 1, BA1
4102 BA2
4103 BA3
4104 BA4
4105 BA5
4106 BA6
4107 BA7
4108 BA8
4109 only SCI 2,Slave 1, BA9
4110 BA10
4111 BA11
4112 BA12
4201 SCI 1 and 2,Slave 2, BA1
4202 BA2
4203 BA3
4204 BA4
4205 BA5
4206 BA6
4207 BA7
4208 BA8
4209 only SCI 2,Slave 2, BA9
4210 BA10
4211 BA11
4212 BA12

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.1.2.4 Significance of the status word messages
NOTE
When faults, alarms and switch-on inhibit of the status word are output (HIGH active) via the terminal strip,
then these are LOW active at the terminal strips (binary outputs) (i.e.: relay drops out)!
This is also valid for possible option boards!
Also refer to Section 4.3.3 "Binary outputs"
Bit 0: Signal, "Ready to switch-on" (H)

An H signal indicates that the operating status SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY-TO-SWITCH-ON (009) is
available. The firing pulses are inhibited.
Bit 1: Signal, "Ready" (H)
H An H signal, indicates that the operating status READY (011) or PRE-CHARGING (010) is available. The firing
pulses are still inhibited.
Bit 2: Signal, "Run" (H)
An H signal indicates that the operating status RUN (014) is available. The firing pulses are enabled and the
output terminals are live.
Bit 3: Signal, "Fault" (H)
An H signal indicates that the operating status FAULT (007) is available. If the fault is output at a terminal strip
(CUR, SCI1/2) an L signal appears there for this fault message.
Bit 4: Signal, "OFF2" (L)
An L signal indicates that an OFF2 command is present via the control word (bit 1).
Bit 5: reserved
Bit 6: Signal, "Switch-on inhibit" (H)

An H signal indicates that the operating status SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008) is present. The message remains as
long an OFF2 command is applied over the control word (bit 1) and/or an ON command is still applied the
control word (bit 0) (edge evaluation).
If the message is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1) an L signal appears there for this message.
Bit 7: Signal, "Alarm" (H)
An H signal indicates that an alarm (Axxx) is present. If the alarm is output at the terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an
L signal appears there for this alarm.
Bit 8: Signal, "Setpoint/actual-value deviation" (L)
The L signal indicates that the absolute value of the difference between the Ud setpoint and the Ud actual value
is greater than or equal to a programmable deviation (P517 "Setpoint/actual-value deviation Ud" for longer than
the "Setpoint/actual-value deviation time" (P518). The bit is again set high as soon as the absolute value of the
difference between the Ud setpoint and the Ud actual value is less than the deviation (P517).
Bit 9: Signal, "PZD control requested" (H)
An H signal is always present.
Bit 10: Message, "Regenerating ready" (H)
Always L in the case of a power supply unit.
Bit 11: Message, "Fault" (reserved, L)
An L signal is always present. If the fault signal is output to a terminal block (CUR, SCI 1/2), an L signal appears
there for this fault.
Bit 12: Signal, "Main contactor energized" (H)
This message is identical to the status of the relay contact at terminals 9-4/5 with which a main contactor can be
driven.

Start-Up 06.01
Bit 13: Message, "Ud reduced" (H)

An H signal indicates that the DC link voltage has been reduced below the following value:
P318 2%
1.35 *U Supply,rectifier * + 1.35 *P071
100% 100% *
The signal changes from H to L when the DC link voltage exceeds the following threshold:
P318  2% + P319 
1.35 *USupply,rectifier * 100% + 100%  *
 1.35 *P071
L signal ("Ud not reduced") is also output for as long as control word 1, Bit 11=0 ("No Ud reduction requested") is
pending and for as long as no Ud reduction command for current-dependent Ud reduction has been generated
internally.
Bit 14: Message, " Motoring mode" (H)
The High signal indicates that the infeed bridge is live or is ready to be made live.
Message, " Generating mode" (L)
The Low signal indicates that the infeed bridge is not live.
Bit 18: Message, "Current limit active" (L)

An L signal indicates that the common rectifier is operating at the current limit. If the message is output at a
terminal (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this message
Bit 19: Signal, "Fault, external 1" (H)
An H signal indicates that a "Fault, external 1" is present in control word bit 15. If this fault is output at a terminal
strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 20: Signal, "Fault, external 2" (H)
An H signal indicates that a "Fault, external 2" is present in control word bit 26. If this fault is output at a terminal
strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 21: Signal, "External alarm" (H)
An H signal indicates that an "Alarm, external 1" is present in control word bit 28, or an "alarm, external 2" in
control word, bit 29.
If this fault is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 22: Signal, "Alarm I2t power section" (H)
H signal indicates that the "I2t alarm power section" (A025) is present. Also refer to Section 7 "Fault and Alarm
Messages".
If this alarm is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 23: Signal "Overtemperature fault signal power section (H)
An H signal indicates that an "Power section temperature too high" fault (F023) is present. Also refer to Section 7
"Fault and Alarm Messages".
If this fault is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears there for this fault signal.
Bit 24: Signal "Overtemperature alarm power section" (H)
An H signal indicates that the "Power section temperature too high" alarm (A022) is present. Also refer to
Section 7 "Fault and Alarm Messages". If this fault is output at a terminal strip (CUR, SCB1), an L signal appears
there for this fault signal.
Bit 31: Signal, "Pre-charging active" (H)

An H signal indicates that the DC link has been charged following a successful ON command.

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.1.3 Setpoints
The only possible setpoint selection that can be programmed on a common rectifier is the selection of the Id
setpoint for a common rectifier in slave mode (e.g. the slave common rectifier in 12-pulse operation) using
parameter
(See also Chapter 5 "Parameter list")
The control word command can be used for effecting the changeover:
"Basic and reserve settings"
See Section 4.4 "Function diagrams"
The source for the setpoint is defined using values:
Value entry in Index1 i001 active when "basic setting" selected" (control word)
Index2 i002 active when "reserve setting" selected (control word)
Value assignment for P486 "Source Id-setpoint":

Value Source
0000 Constant setpoint = 0 Factory setting: P486 i001, i002

2002 SST1 (PMU -X300 or -X100:1...5) Word2
2003 Word3
2004 Word4 ⇐ only if word 4 is not assigned for "control
word 2 with 2004 (Section 4.3.1.1)
... consecutively to
2016 Word16
OPTIONS
3002 CB/TB Word2
3003 Word3
3004 Word4 ⇐ only if word 4 is not assigned for "control
3016 Word16)
4101 SCB1 with SCI 1,Slave1, analog input AE1
4102 AE2
4103 AE3
4201 SCB1 with SCI 1,Slave2, analog input AE1
4202 AE2
4203 AE3
4501 SCB-SST (only Peer to Peer, Word1) ⇐ only if word 1 is not assigned for "control
4502 USS /Peer to Peer, Word2
4504 USS /Peer to Peer, Word4 ⇐ only if word 4 is not assigned for "control
4506 only USS, Word6
4516 only USS, Word6
6002 SST2 (PTP1, A2-X117:1..5) Peer-to-Peer, Word2

Start-Up 06.01
4.3.1.4 Actual values
All available parameter numbers (0 to 999) can be entered into the actual value parameters, sorted according to
destinations (refer to the following).
The parameter value of the entered parameter number is output at the selected destination.
Note: - When specifying parameter numbers, which are indexed, the value of the first index
(.i001) is always output!
- When specifying "0", no output is made to the appropriate destination!
Destinations:
P655 "CUR-AA actual values"

Output via the CUR control terminal strip (Section 3.3)
Analog output 1 (-X102:14 / reference potential -X102:15)
(refer to Section 4.3.5 "analog output")
P680 "SST1 actual values"

Output via the basic converter interface SST1
Indices: i001 Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)
⇓ ⇓
i016 Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)
(refer to Section 4.3.6.1 "basic converter interface SST1")
Destination, options:
P664 "SCI-AA actual values"

Output via the SCB1 interface with SCI1
(also refer to the Instruction Manual for the option boards)
Indexes: i001 Destination: Analog output 1 from slave 1
i002 Destination: Analog output 2 from slave 1
P690 "SCB actual values"

Output via the SCB1 interface with peer-to-peer protocol or SCB2
(also refer to the Instruction Manual for the option boards)
Indexes: i001 Destination: Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)
⇓ ⇓
i016 Destination: Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)
P694 "CB/TB actual values"

Output via the CB or TB interface
(also refer to the Instruction Manual for the option boards and Sections 4.3.6.2 "DPR")
Indexes: i001 Destination: Word 01 of the telegram (PZD)
⇓ ⇓
i016 Destination: Word 16 of the telegram (PZD)
NOTE
For telegram data transfer (P680,P690,P694), it is generally necessary/practical to assign "Word 01 of the
telegram (PZD)" with status word 1 (r968 or r552)!

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.2 Binary inputs
5 binary inputs (24V) which can be parameterized at the control terminal strip (board CUR, -X101) to enter
commands, external faults/alarms as well as a checkback signal to the common rectifier control word.
Connecting-up:
Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip "
Parameterization:
Refer to Section 4.3.1.1 "Control word"
Function of the binary inputs for factory setting with P077 = 0 (see Section 4.3.9.1):
Binary input 1 ON/OFF 1 command (control word bit 0)

for RESERVE SETTING (binary input 5 = high state)
Binary input 2 OFF2 command "pulse inhibit" (control word bit 1)
Binary input 3 Acknowledge (control word bit 7)
Binary input 4 No function
Binary input 5 RESERVE/BASIC SETTING (control word bit 30)
4.3.3 Binary outputs
2 binary outputs, which can be parameterized, for the output of signals and external commands of the
common rectifier status word.
Connecting-up:
Binary output 1 on the CUR control terminal strip (connector X104 / NO contact):
Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip"
Binary output 2 on the CUR control terminal strip (connector X104 / NO contact):
Refer to Section 3.3 "Control terminal strip"
Parameterization:
Refer to Section 4.3.1.2 "Status word"
Factory setting:
Binary output 1 No function (relay always de-energized)
X104 on the CUR
Binary output 2 Fault (status word bit 3)
X104 on the CUR
NOTE
When faults, alarms and switch-on inhibit of the status word (HIGH active) are output via the terminal strip,
these are LOW active at the terminal strip (binary outputs) (i.e. relay drops out)!
Also refer to Section 4.3.1.2 "Status word".

Start-Up 06.01
4.3.5 Analog output
output actual values and other internal common rectifier quantities.

Analog output: - Voltage range: ± 10V
- Resolution: 39mV (8 bits + sign)
- Accuracy: ± 5%
- Smoothing: 20ms
- Output current: max. ± 5mA
- Short-circuit proof and non-floating
Connecting-up:
Refer to "Control terminal strip", Section 3.3
Parameterization:
Also observe "Function diagram, analog output CUR", Section 4.4!
♦ Enter the parameter number (0 to 999) whose value is to output, in P655 "CUR-AA actual values".
♦ Set the analog output gain factor in P656 "CUR-AA gain".
(setting range: -320.00V to +320.00V / pre-setting: +10.00V ⇔ gain of 1)
♦ Set the offset in P657 "CUR-AA offset".
(setting range: -100.00V to +100.00V / pre-setting: +0.00V ⇔ no offset)
The following is obtained for the calculation from the "Function diagram, analog output CUR":
 Parameter value in[%] 

Uoff =  × G ainin[V ] + Offset in[V ]
 100 [%] 
Pre-assignment (gain of 1 and no offset): 100% = 10V
The parameter value in [%] for the appropriate parameter number can be taken from the parameter list,
Chapter 5!

06.01 Start-Up
• Configuring examples:
Example 1: Available: P071 (line voltage) = 400 V
Required: Map the actual DC link voltage r037 between 400 and 600 V to 0.00V to
+10.00 V at the analog output
♦ Connect-up parameter R037 at the analog output:

P655 "CUR-AA actual values" = 037
♦ Converter the required output range in [%]:

r037 should be taken from the parameter list, Section 5:
Analog output: 100% = 1.35 x P071 (in this case: 1.35 x 400 V = 540 V)
Thus, the following is obtained for the range to be represented:

400 V → 74.05% (Parameter value PWE1) to be represented as Uoff1 = 0.00 V
600 V → 111.07% (Parameter value PWE2) to be represented as Uoff2 = +10.00 V
♦ Define gain factor P656 and offset P657:
The following is obtained from the formula shown above:
(Uoff1 [V ] − Uoff2 [V ]) × 100 % (0.00 V − 10.00 V) × 100 %

Gain factor [V ] = =
PWE 1 [%] − PWE 2 [%] 74.05 % − 111.07 %
− 10,00 V × 100
= = 27.03 V
− 37 %
 Gain factor [V ]× PWE 1 [%]  27.03 V × 74.05 % 

Offset [V ] = Uoff1 [V ] −   = 0V −  
 100 %   100 % 
 27.03 V × 74.05 % 
= 0V −  = −19.98 V
 100 % 
To be adjusted: gain: P656 = +27,03V

offset: P657 = −19,98V

Start-Up 06.01
Example 2: Available: P075 (rated DC current) = 420 A
Required: Map the output current r035 between -630 and +630 A to -10.00 V to
+10.00 A at the analog output
♦ Connect-up parameter r035 at the analog output:

P655 "CUR-AA actual values“ = 035
♦ Convert the required output range in [%]:

r035 should be taken from the parameter list, Section 5:
Analog output: 100% = P075
Thus, the following is obtained for the range to be represented:

-630 A → -150% (Parameter value PWE1) represented as Voff1 = -10.00 V
+630 A → 150% (Parameter value PWE2) represented as Voff2 = +10.00 V
♦ Define gain factor P656 and offset P657:
The following is obtained from the formula shown above:
(Uoff1 [V ] − Uoff2 [V ]) × 100 % ( −10.00 V − 10.00 V) × 100 %

Gain factor [V ] = =
PWE 1 [%] − PWE 2 [%] - 150 % − 150 %
− 20.00 V × 100 %
= = 6.67 V
− 300 %
 Gain factor [V ]× PWE 1 [%]  6.67 V × (- 150.00 %) 

Offset [V ] = Uoff1 [V ] −   = −10V −  
 100 %   100 % 
= −10 V + 10.00 V = 0.00 V
To be adjusted: Gain P656 = +6,67 V

offset P657 = 0,00 V

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.6 Serial interfaces
4.3.6.1.1 Basic converter interface SST1
The USS protocol (universal serial interface) is implemented at the basic converter interface SST1.
The following documentation is available depending on the particular application of the SST1 basic converter
interface:
♦ Connection of higher-level programmable controllers with USS protocol:

SIMOVERT Master Drives
Use of the serial interface with USS protocol
Order No.: 6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0
♦ Additional general comments regarding connecting-up and parameterization:
♦ Connecting-up: Also refer to "Control terminal strip" Section 3.3
NOTE
Communications can either be realized via the terminal strip of CUR-X100 (RS485 standard) or the interface
connector on PMU-X300 (9-pin SUB D connector / RS485 or RS232)
Only one of the two possible connections (-X100 or -X300) may be used!
NOTE
The bus terminating resistors (total 150 Ω) must be switched-in at the last bus node (slave).
To realize this, jumpers of DIP-FIX switches S1 and S2 must be closed on board CUR!
♦ Parameterization:
- Defining the interface: P683 to P687

- Define the process data (control word, status word, setpoints, actual values) for the interface:
Refer to "Process data" Section 4.3.1
- Parametrierfreigabe: P053 oder P927
NOTE
The factory setting (refer to "Parameter list" Chapter 5) can be used if the SST1 basic converter interface is not
used!
4.3.6.1.2 Basic converter interface SST2 (A2-X117), see Section 9.6, Options
4.3.6.2 Dual-Port-Ram (DPR for SCB, CB, TB)
The dual-port RAM is the internal interface on the CUR (-X107) to connect possible option boards via the
backplane bus of the electronics box (LDA bus adapter required).
Possible option boards: TB (Technology board);

SCB (serial communications board); CB (Communications board).
To connect possible option boards and parameterize the interface, also refer to the Section 3.5 "Recommended
circuits" as well as in the appropriate Instruction Manuals to the various option boards.
Additional information can be taken from Sections 4.3.1.1 to 4.3.1.4 "Control word, status word, setpoints, actual
values".

Start-Up 06.01
4.3.9 Function selection (P052)
Function selection is activated via parameter P052 and permits various special functions during the start-up
phase.
Access stage 2 (P051 = 2) must be enabled and the common rectifier may only be in the "Run" (R) status. Apart
from this, P053 must be set for parameter enable (e.g. P053=6).
The following functions are available:
- Return from function selection (P052 = 0)

- Generate factory setting (P052 = 1)
- Initialization (MLFB setting) (P052 = 2)
- Download (P052 = 3)
- Hardware configuration (P052 = 4)
- Drive setting (P052 = 5)
- Forming (P052 = 20)
- Circuit identification (P052 = 21)
- Display modified parameters (P052 = 22)
The "Generate factory setting", "Forming", and "Circuit identification" functions are automatically reset on
completion, i.e. P052 = 0 ("Return").
The other functions must be manually reset!
4.3.9.1 Generate factory setting (P052 = 1 or P970 = 0)
This function is used to reset the parameter values, in accordance with a) the parameter list (dispatch status for
the unit; see Section 5, column 4) and b) parameter P077 (see below). Only the settings of parameters P070
(MLFB) and P077 (type of factory setting) remain unchanged.
The MLFB-dependent parameters P071, P075 and P076 are set in accordance with the type of the common
rectifier (see Section 4.3.9.2 "Initialization").
The parameters dependent on P077 are set in accordance with the table shown below.
In the normal case (P070=0), the values listed in the parameter list in Section 5 are used as factory settings, so
the table shown below does not have to be considered.
For fast parameterization of special functions, using P077=1 to 6, an appropriate set of factory settings can be
selected for certain parameters in accordance with the table shown below. In this manner, for example, certain
terminals of the basic unit can be parameterized fast as sources for certain control word functions.
The following table shows the factory settings for the parameters that are dependent on P077:
Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard

Para- Normal cubicle with cubicle with cubicle with cubicle with cubicle with
meters Designation of factory terminals PMU OP1S PMU as OP1S as
depend. the parameter setting 12-pulse slave 12-pulse slave
on on OP1S P077= 0 P077= 1 P077= 2 P077= 4 P077= 5 P077= 6
P077 Basic Res. Basic Res. Basic Res. Basic Res. Basic Res. Basic Res.
(i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002)
P486 Src Current Setp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6002 0 6002 0
P554 Src ON/OFF1 1010 1001 2001 1001 1003 1010 1003 2001 6001 1010 6001 2001
P555 Src1 OFF2(electr.) 1010 1002 2001 1002 1003 1010 1003 2001 6001 1010 6001 2001
P561 Src InvRelease 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6001 1 6001 1
P565 Src1 fault reset 0 1003 0 1003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P566 Src2 fault reset 0 0 0 0 1004 0 1004 0 6001 0 6001 0
P567 Src3 fault reset 2001 2001 2001 2001 0 0 2001 2001 2001 0 2001 2001
P572 Src RegenRelease 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6001 1 6001 1
P575 Src No ExtFault1 1 1 1 1 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001
P583 Src 12-pulse mode 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
P587 Src Master/Slave 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
P588 Src No Ext Warn1 1 1 1 1 1002 1002 1002 1002 1002 1002 1002 1002
P607 Trg Bit Warning 0 0 1001 1001 1001 1001
The factory setting for P607.002 (responsible for the optional SCI1/2 module) is not affected by P077.

06.01 Start-Up
In column 1, the parameters are listed for which the factory setting depends on P077. The right-hand columns
contain the factory settings for index 1 and 2 of these parameters depending on the value of parameter P077.
The values in the column "Normal factory setting" (P077=0) are the same as those listed in the parameter list in
Chapter 5 and are in accordance with the standard factory setting.
When P077 is set and the function "Generate factory setting" is selected, all parameters are set to their factory
settings, whereby the P077-dependent factory settings are taken into account.
"Generate factory setting" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit" (008), "Ready-to-switch-
on" (009) or "Fault" (007).
Procedure:
If a special factory setting dependent on P077 is not required, i.e. P077=0, part a) of the following procedure is
not required and you start with part b).
a) Start of the procedure when a special factory setting is required, otherwise start at b) :
⇓ P051 = 3 Access stage "Expert mode" to permit access to P077
⇓ P052 = 2 Select "Initialize" function to modify P077
⇓ P key The operating display appears (000)
⇓ P077 Select the required P077-dependent parameter set in accordance with the
above table
⇓ P052 = 0 Terminate the function "Initialize"
⇓ P key The operating display appears. Then continue with b) .
b) Start of the procedure when a normal factory setting is required:
⇓ P052 = 1 Function selection, "Generate factory setting"

(or P970 = 0)
⇓ P key The operating display appears (001),

and the following parameters can be re-assigned:
- Factory setting for all parameters according to the parameter list in Chapter 5
also the board configuration P090/P091) taking P077 into account
- Data of the common rectifier (from the MLFB / P070)

P071 Rated voltage at the input of the rectifier bridge
P075 Rated DC current
P076 Configuration of the power section
⇓ The operating display "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) appears after the
factory setting has been completed.

Start-Up 06.01
4.3.9.2 Initialization (MLFB setting) (P052 = 2)
This function is used to change the common rectifier MLFB (type setting).
The parameters P071, P075 and P076 are only set dependent on the new MLFB when changing the MLFB .
"Initialization" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit" (008), "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) or
"Fault" (007).
Procedure:
⇓ P051 = 3 Access stage "Expert mode" to permit access to P070
⇓ P052 = 2 Function selection "Initialization"
⇓ P070 Specification of the number of the MLFB of the common rectifier (rating plate
data on the unit) according to the table at the end of this Section.
⇓ P052 = 0 Terminate the function "Initialize"
⇓ P key The operating display appears and once the MLFB has been modified, the
following parameters are reassigned in accordance with the MLFB:
P071 Rated voltage at the input to the rectifier bridge
P075 Rated DC current
P076 Only the ones position is modified
Ones position =1: Ones position =1: only power supply
operation possible (is set automatically for P070≥101
(power supply unit))
⇓ The operating display "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) appears after
"Initialization" has been completed
MLFB table (see next page):

Brief description of the table columns:
PWE Parameter value (to be entered at initialization / PMU / P070)

MLFB Machine-readable product designation (see rating plate)
I(n) Rated DC current in A (P075)
U-Kl. Voltage class, voltage range
BF Type of construction
MLFB-table:
PWE MLFB Rated current Supply voltage BF

[A] [V]
0 none 0,0 0 0
101 6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0 774,0 3AC 500-600V H
102 6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0 774,0 3AC 660-690V H
103 6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0 821,0 3AC 380-480V H
104 6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0 1023,0 3AC 500-600V H
105 6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0 1023,0 3AC 380-480V H
106 6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0 1023,0 3AC 660-690V H
107 6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0 1285,0 3AC 500-600V K
108 6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0 1285,0 3AC 660-690V K

06.01 Start-Up
PWE MLFB Rated current Supply voltage BF

[A] [V]
109 6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0 1333,0 3AC 380-480V K
110 6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0 1464,0 3AC 660-690V K
111 6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0 1464,0 3AC 500-600V K
118 6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0 1780,0 3AC 380-480V K
119 6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0 1880,0 3AC 660-690V K
120 6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0 1880,0 3AC 500-600V K
124 6SE7041-5EH85-0BA0 1500,0 3AC 380-480V H

125 6SE7041-3FH85-0BA0 1300,0 3AC 500-600V H
126 6SE7041-3HH85-0BA0 1300,0 3AC 660-690V H
127 6SE7042-1EH85-0BA0 2100,0 3AC 380-480V H
128 6SE7042-0FH85-0BA0 1950,0 3AC 500-600V H
129 6SE7042-0HH85-0BA0 1950,0 3AC 660-690V H
130 6SE7042-8EH85-0BA0 2850,0 3AC 380-480V H
131 6SE7042-1HH85-0BA0 2100,0 3AC 660-690V H
132 6SE7042-8FH85-0BA0 2850,0 3AC 500-600V H
133 6SE7042-8HH85-0BA0 2850,0 3AC 660-690V H
4.3.9.3 Download or upread (P052 = 3)
P052 has to be set to 3 when a "download" (write) or "upload" (read) has to be carried out for the parameters of
the common rectifier at the basic unit interface (SST1) using USS protocol (e.g. using SIMOVIS or OP1S).
“Upread/Download" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit" (008), "Ready-to-switch-on"
(009) or "Fault" (007).
Procedure:
⇓ P052 = 3 Function selection “Upread/Download"
⇓ P key The operating display appears(021)
- Using a PC at the basic device interface SST1 and an appropriate application program (e.g.
SIMOVIS), it is possible to read and change all parameters independently of their operating
state and access level (P051).
⇓ P052 = 0 Function selection Return
⇓ P key
⇓ After return, the operating display appears, "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on"
(009)

Start-Up 06.01
4.3.9.4 Hardware configuration (P052 = 4)
This function is used to select option boards (SCB, CB, TB) in the common rectifier electronics box.
In order to install these modules, an LBA bus coupling (Local Bus Adapter) is required for the electronics box
(see Section 9.1)!
All parameters, which can be written into the "Hardware configuration" status ("H", refer to the right-hand column
in the parameter list in Chapter 5), can be changed.
The "hardware configuration" selection can be realized in the "Switch-on inhibit", "Ready-to-switch" or "Fault"
status
Ablauf:
⇓ P052 = 4 Function selection Hardware configuration
⇓ P051 = 3 Access stage Expert mode ( to change the following parameters)
⇓ Set the parameters to configure the optional board (see Section 4.5 or the
operating instructions for the board)
⇓ P090 = Board, slot 2 (To the RIGHT in the electronics box!)

P091 = Board, slot 3 (In the CENTER in the electronics box!)
Parameter values for P090/P091:
0: No option board
1: CB Communications board
2: TB Technology board (only P090)
3: SCB Serial Communication Board
⇓ Additional parameters, depending on the option boards (refer to the associated Instruction
Manuals or Section 4.5)
⇓ P052 = 0 Function selection return
⇓ P key The operating display appears (r000) while parameters and interval variables
are being re-assigned
- The hardware is initialized
If error/fault message F050, F070 or F080 appears: see Chapter 7
⇓ After the selected function selection has been completed, the "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or
"Ready-to-switch-on" (009) operating display appears.

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.9.5 Drive setting (P052 = 5)
This function is used to change the drive setting(rectifier data, system data).
This includes all parameters that can be written in the "Drive setting" status ("A" ,see right-hand column of the
parameter list in Chapter 5).
Once you have completed the drive setting procedure, you can decide whether to implement the function
selection "Forming" (P052=20) or "Circuit identification" (P052 = 21) or whether just to reset the status
(P052 = 0).
"Drive setting" can be selected in the following statuses: "Switch-on inhibit", "Ready-to-switch-on" or "Fault".
Procedure:
⇓ P052 = 5 Function selection Drive setting
⇓ P051 = 3 Access stage Expert mode - (if all parameters, which can be accessed in the
"drive setting" status (A) are required)
⇓ All parameters, which can be written into the "drive setting" (A) status (see
right-hand column of the parameter list in Chapter 5), can be changed.
⇓ if necessary ⇓ P052 = 20 Function selection " Forming "

(refer to Section 4.3.9.6)
⇓ P052 = 21 Function selection " Circuit identification "
(refer to Section 4.3.9.7)
⇓ P052 = 0 Return
⇓ The display appears (r000) while parameters and internal variables are being
de-assigned, depending on the function selected.
⇓ The "Switch-on inhibit" (008) or "Ready-to-switch-on" (009) operating display appears after the
selected function or selection has been completed

Start-Up 06.01
4.3.9.6 Form DC link (P052 = 20)
DANGER
The "Form DC link" function may only be implemented if the common
rectifier and the converter(s) connected have the same voltage class
(9th digit position of the MLFB).
If the converters have been left to stand idle for more than a year, the DC link capacitors must be re-formed. If
the converters are taken into service within a year of being delivered (factory number, rating plate); it is not
necessary to re-form the DC link capacitors. For more details on this subject, please refer to Section 4.3.12 of
the converter's operating instructions
The DC link capacitors are formed as described below.
The "Form DC link" function can be selected in the "Ready to switch on" status (009).
Procedure:
⇓ P408 Set the forming time (1.0 to 600.0 minutes; see Section 4.3.12 of the
converter's operating instructions
⇓ P052 = 20 Select the "Form DC link" function"
⇓ P key The operating display appears:

The common rectifier must be switched on within 20 s, otherwise message
F091 (fault value 4) appears.
⇓ Switch on the rectifier/regenerating unit
NOTE
The firing pulses are enabled, the common rectifier carries current and the DC link is charged!
During the forming procedure, the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives FC, VC, SC must not be switched on.
⇓ Forming of the DC link takes place (duration as set with P406):

While the forming time P408 is running, the control angle is reduced linearly from 120 degrees
to 30 degrees and the DC link capacitor is charged up to the peak value of rectifier supply
voltage.
If DC link voltage reduction is selected (control word 1 bit 11, P571), the forming procedure will
be completed on reaching a DC link voltage of P318 * rectifier network peak value.
During the forming procedure, the current limit set at P160 is not effective.
⇓ When this function has been completed, the "Ready to switch on" display (009) appears.

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.9.7 Circuit identification (P052 = 21)
This function identifies the DC link and the supply and re-assigns certain control parameters.
Specific closed-loop control parameters are re-assigned in connection with this function.
Only the parameters of the reserve data sets currently selected are modified (see "Data sets" in Section 4.1.2
and "Selecting the data sets" in Section 4.4).
NOTE
Circuit identification (i.e. automatic setting of the appropriate parameters) must be carried out, otherwise error
message F061 will be generated when the unit is switched on.
While circuit identification is being carried out, the constellation of supply, and reactor arrangement as well as
the capacitive load connected to the DC link terminals of the common rectifier must be identical to the
constellation for normal operation later. The main reason being that the Ud controller gain that is set depends
on the measured intermediate circuit capacitance.
If more than one inverter of the series SIMOVERT Master Drives 6SE70 are to be operated with the common
rectifier, whereby the number of inverters connected to the DC link at any one time varies, it is recommended
that reserve data set selection is implemented. Up to 4 different configurations can be formed for this purpose
that are each assigned to a reserve data set. Circuit identification has to be carried out separately for each of
these reserve data sets. During circuit identification, the appropriate configuration must exist for the selected
data set.
Circuit identification must be carried out whenever the supply network changes and/or whenever the number of
connected inverters changes.
The "Circuit identification" function can be aborted at any time with an OFF command. This triggers fault
message F091 "Circuit identification aborted by external cause".
During circuit identification, which is carried out in a series of separate stages, code numbers appear on the
PMU that indicate the current working stage.
If an error occurs during a stage, the circuit identification function is aborted. The exact cause of the abort is
indicated in the fault value r949 assigned to the fault number memory r947 (for a non-reset fault in index i001
and if reset in index i009).
You will find a detailed description of the fault messages, associated fault values and a description on the
warning messages in Chapter 7 "Faults and Warnings".

Start-Up 06.01
Die Anwahl "Stromkreisidentifikation" kann im Zustand "Einschaltbereit" (009) erfolgen.
Ablauf:
⇓ P052 = 21 Funktionsanwahl Stromkreisidentifikation
⇓ P-Taste Es erscheint die Betriebsanzeige:

Die Einspeiseeinheit muss innerhalb von 20s eingeschaltet werden, sonst
erfolgt die Störmeldung F091 (Störwert 4).
⇓ Einschalten der Einspeiseeinheit
NOTE
During circuit identification the trigger pulses are released, the power supply unit draws current and the link
circuit is partially charged:
Initially the control angle is reduced starting from 120 degrees until the link circuit voltage reaches 12.5 % of
1.35 * mains supply voltage, after which a single large current crest is generated by triggering a thyristor pair at
a control angle of 92 degrees. The current crest generated has a current conduction angle of approx. 40
degrees, the peak value depends on the inductance of the incoming feeder circuit.
During circuit identification the motoring plant current limit P160 is not effective. The sum of the rated currents
of the inverters connected to the power supply unit should be appreciably less than the rated current of the
power supply unit.
⇓ The operating display appears. Circuit identification takes about 10 s with a discharged DC link
capacitor. The following parameters are set automatically:
P140 Circuit resistance of the rectifier bridge

P141 Circuit inductance of the rectifier bridge
P144 Capacitance of the DC link
P310 Proportional gain of current controller
P311 Integral-action time of current controller
P313 Proportional gain of DC link voltage controller
⇓ On completion of the function, "Ready to switch on" (009) appears in the display.
NOTE
If a fault message occurs during circuit identification, the cause of the fault must be eliminated and the function
repeated (see Section 7.1).
Circuit identification for 12-pulse mode must be carried out in succession on the 12-pulse master and on the 12-
pulse slave units (see Section 3.8.5).

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.9.8 Display modified parameters (P052 = 22)
This function is used to display all parameters (regardless of the access stage) that differ from the factory setting
(i.e. plant-specific parameters). This function only works with operator control via the PMU but not with the
OP1S.
Adjustable parameters that have no factory setting (P070) or whose value depends on other parameters
(P071,...) are regarded as "modified".
Those parameters that are dependent on P077 (see Section 4.3.9.1 "Factory setting") whose values differ from
the setting for P077=0 are also regarded as modified.
"Modified" parameters for "special access" are also displayed that are only accessible to specially trained
personnel using P799.
The "Display modified parameters" function can be selected in all operating statuses.
Procedure:
⇓ P052 = 22 Select the "Display modified parameters" function
⇓ P key Only parameters that differ from the factory setting appear on the PMU (i.e.
plant-specific parameters), irrespective of the access stage (P051). It is not
possible to modify the parameter value here.
⇓ P052 = 0 Select the Return function
⇓ P key
NOTE
Parameters r990 and r991 provide a list of modified parameters for the PMU and also for the OP1S.
4.3.10 Functions
4.3.10.1 WEA (automatic restart)
The Automatic Restart function can be used for the automatic acknowledgment of faults and automatic restart of
the unit following a power failure (F003, F004, F005, F007, F009 or F010) without the operator having to
intervene.
If there is no voltage on one of the terminals 1U/L1, 1V/L2, 1W/L3, X9.1, X9.2, or if their values are not within the
tolerance range and the DC link voltage has dropped below the threshold P074 * 1.35 * P071, the common
rectifier responds as follows:
P366 = 0: WEA (automatic restart) is inhibited
No automatic restart; the relevant fault message (F003, F004, F005, F007, F009 or F010) is
initiated..
P366 = 1: Acknowledgment of power failure after system recovery
The common rectifier enters the operating status o008 (Switch-on inhibit) or o009 (when switching
on/off with the I/O keys of the PMU). On power recovery, a new ON command must be given to
enable the DC link to re-charge. The converter is not automatically restarted by the WEA function.

Start-Up 06.01
P366 = 2 Restart after system recovery and pre-charging of the DC link after system recovery
While the system is down, the automatic controllers and firing pulses of the rectifier bridge are
inhibited. The common rectifier enters the status o010. On power recovery, the unit is automatically
switched on again by the WEA. The DC link is re-charged.
The unit is only switched back on again if there is still an ON command (control word bit 0) active
following system recovery. The WEA function is therefore not possible with an ON command (control
word bit 0) programmed from the PMU or operator panel OP1S provided the external 24 V supply
does not fail.
IMPORTANT: External measures must be taken to guarantee safety on an automatic restart!
Warning A065 (Automatic restart active):

This warning bit is set following a system failure if the automatic restart function is active, and reset following a
restart by the WEA and completion of the pre-charging process.
The unit can also be switched off by a manual OFF command during this restart phase. Please also refer to
Chapter 7 "Faults and Warnings"
WARNING
In the event of system failures when the WEA function has been activated (P366 = 2), the
unit may restart on system recovery and re-charge the DC link.
Consequently when the WEA function of the connected inverter has been activated
(P366 = 2 or P366 = 3) the inverter can be switched on once more.
Fatal injuries, severe bodily harm or damage to property and machinery may result if the
area surrounding the drive is entered while the drive is in this state.
NOTE
If the kinetic buffering function (KIP) is activated on a connected converter from the series SIMOVERT Master
Drives 6SE70, on the common rectifier, P366=2 must be parameterized.
If two common rectifiers for 12-pulse mode are coupled via peer-to-peer protocol via the basic unit interface
SST2, the peer-to-peer telegram failure time monitoring must be switched off via P687.i003=0 on the "12-pulse
master" unit, otherwise the automatic switch-on with the parameterization P366=2 (on both units) will not work
correctly if the electronics supply voltage fails.

06.01 Start-Up
4.3.10.2 Externally requested and current-dependent Ud reduction
Up to and including Unit Software Release 3.1, Ud reduction was implemented only upon external request by
means of the control word 1 command "Ud reduction demanded" (STW1, Bit 11= 1):
When an edge is detected on this command (source selection by P571), the Ud setpoint is lowered to the value
(1.35*Umains,infeed*P318/100.00%) according to P318 (with or without deceleration ramp according to P330,
depending on whether P330 has an odd or even value) and regenerative feedback is disabled (the message
"Recovery not ready“ is displayed, status word ZSW1, Bit 10= 0). The DC link should now discharge (free
discharge or current withdrawal from the DC link). When the DC link voltage has been reduced, the message
"Ud is reduced" is issued via ZSW1, Bit 13= 1. Energy recovery is re-released again, the message ZSW1, Bit
10= 1 is issued. When the message "Ud is reduced" has been issued, an inverter connected to the DC link may
start returning energy into the DC link.
An external logical linking is required for the energy recovery!
As from Unit Software Release 3.2, the Ud can also be reduced automatically, as an alternative, depending on
the DC link current Id:
When the current-dependent Ud reduction is released by P323= 1, the command for the reduction is generated
internally by Ud. The Ud setpoint is automatically reduced to the value in accordance with P318 when Id
(averaged over 3 current crests) falls below the threshold P321. If Id exceeds the sum of threshold P321 and
hysteresis P322, the "full" Ud setpoint value (1.35*Uline,feed) is selected again. In contrast to Ud lowering by
means of STW1, bit 11, precharge time P329 or discharge time P330 are always active (setpoint input with
ramp) when the Ud setpoint is specified internally.
Attention: Undisturbed recovery mode is only possible if, after falling below P321, the load current withdrawn
(by the inverters connected to the DC link) still remains positive for a sufficient length of time before
changing direction to permit a reduction of the DC link voltage to the specified value before recovery
is started. The current-dependent Ud reduction functions therefore only if an appropriate load cycle
exists !

Start-Up 06.01
4.4 Function diagrams
Notes on the function diagrams:
The function diagrams on the two following sheets show the controller structure of the common rectifier unit.
A value in brackets for a parameter indicates the factory setting of the parameter in question.
Switch positions drawn are the factory setting.
These function diagrams also contain parameters that are not listed in the parameter list (Chapter 5) of these
operating instructions. They are the expert parameters that are only visible at the PMU if P051 = 3 and P799 = 4.
These expert parameters contain a useful factory setting and must not usually be altered.
Not only the parameter but also the most important "connectors" (Kxxx) are drawn into the function diagrams.
Connectors can be seen as "digital measuring points" of internal controlled variables or memory locations (e.g.
DC link voltage K287, DC link current K114, control angle K100). The connectors are only used for factory
internal diagnostic purposes and are not described in more detail in these operating instructions. A hexadecimal
display of a single connector value is possible using the expert parameters P787 and r786 on the PMU by
parameterizing the number of the connector to be displayed at parameter r786 at P787.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
06.01
Ud control, Id setpoint generation Command for Ud_set_reduction:

Additional important connectors:
Figure 4.4.1
Ud_set- Threshold K315 STW1 (control word)
reduction Id-dependent Ud reduction P321 (30,00%)
externally via STW1, bit11 K326 ZSW1 (status word)
P318 (80,00%) P321 P322
(source selection with P571) K300 Operating status
100% 106,8% 100% 1 Hysteresis K388 Firing cycle duration
Connector selection display (HEX) P797 Id K109 P322 (20,00%)
(0011) K105 Thyristor pair code
r786 1 0 0 1
P787 (0) 0 Id K360 Deviation of passage through zero
≥1
K & K301 Regenerative feedback network voltage U-V
K302 Regenerative feedback network voltage V-W
P323 (0)
K303
Regenerative -feedback network voltage W-U

Rounding 60ms
1,35*P071 *3) Kp correction *1)
Precharging time Deadband
P329 (500ms) pos. threshold Kp Tn
K190 P316 (0,01%) P313 P314 Effective Kp
1,35 Time const.. = 1s max
U_netw_infeed r038 K175
(network voltage at r036
infeed power section) Ud controller K160
+
K304
Ud control, Id setpoint generation

-
r030 K168
Filtering min K213 P317 (-1,00%) K163
P330 (2000ms) Deadband (0010)
1,35*P071 Discharging time Ramp-function- neg. threshold P315
generator correction *2) P component (active)
r006 I component (= 0)
K346
(Firing cycle K194
r037
mean value) P074 (61%)
1
Ud K292
0
Ud *2) K190: = Set K167 (Ud actual value):
K287 K167 K165
on neg. edge ov "Ud_set reduction",
(Last sampling value) C on "no operation"
C correction *1)
(0010) P144 P320 (5ms) P320 (5) on AUS1 and "not ready for regenerative feedback",
P315 in 12-pulse operation on waiting in status "- -"
(3rd sampling value) 9999
Ud 0
0%
∆Ud to Sheet 2
Id - C 1
Id K114
∆t Id additional
<>9999 setpoint selection
Load current Average of three P488 (0)
P488 (0)
ENGLISH
(Current maximum Filtering
value mean) injection
SST2 peer-to-peer, word5 6005

K109 K178 K173 K171 SST2 peer-to-peer, word4 6004
SST2 peer-to-peer, word3 6003
r035
Average of three
*3) ramp-up/ramp-down time: = 0 on K179

*1) on unbal. parallel switching acc. to request by STW.bit11 controlled 0% 0
P076 and / or 12-pulse operation Ud_set_deceleration logic
if no AUS1 pending)
Sheet 1
4-47
Start-Up
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4-48
Disable regenerative feedback on:
Start-Up
Id control, firing pulse STW1.Bit12 = 0 (no regen._feedback enable),

P797 Ud (last sampling value) Ud > 0,9375*1,35*U_netw_regen._feedback or
(0011) Ud > 0,875*1,35*U_netw_regen._feedb. at AUS1,
Figure 4.4.2
U_new_regenerative_feedback K305 Ud > 1,35*U_netw_regen._feedback*P318/100%
Selection Id (if the Ud_set reduction logic demands it),
setpoint for Id control U_netw_regen._feedback < P074,
P486 (0) precharging (ramp_function ramp acc. P329),
Ud Ud_setpoint P774 P773 STW1, bit 12 P076=xx1 (motorized operation only)
Logic for
(-3,00%) (0,01%) (source
preventing infeed
SST2 peer-to-peer, word 5 6005 selection
or regenerative with P572)
SST2 peer-to-peer, word 4 6004 P076 P074
feedback P774 0.05%
Infeed / regenerative feedback / no supply direction (002) (61%)
SST2 peer-to-peer, word 3 6003 Id *2) U netw> P074
I
ENGLISH
0 alpha-W-shift
II
0% 0 P773
Additional
alpha-W-pulse
Id control, firing pulse

I-Ant. = 0
P315
K100 (0010)
Stop I component
K147 Kp Tn
P310 P311
Current limit (0,15) (0,015s)
in infeed direction Lowest pos.
Control set
Control word, bit27 P775 (0°) MI 1
(source selection P160 (150,0%) current limit Id_set K118 K110
MI 2
with P587) K131 r034 alpha-G MI 3
Id controller
MI 4
0 bzw. = MI 5
1 -0,006% +
*1) MI 6
from Sheet 1 -
0 MII 1
Ud//Id control alpha-W MII 2
switchover K120 r033 MII 3
(Mester-/Slave- (2111) MII 4
operation) P161 (-150,0%) K132 P312 K113 K102 MII 5
currrent limit in Setpoint average P312 (2111)
Lowest neg. MII 6
Control word I2t regenerative current limit P component (active)
K119
P785 (1) feedback direction I component (active)
Ud
U_netw_infeed
Temperature model, K292
U_netw_regenerative_feedback (0011)
limitation to P778, P779, Id, Ud, U_netw
K310 P797
±150%, +136%/-125% (filtering/averaging
Long / short
or +100%/-92% Thyristor and phase correction
Id pulses
temperature rise Feedforward control of network passages
through zero)
U_contr
P777
(20,00%)
*1) 0... current value 165° P777
1 ... average of three Id, soll
Actual value average K121
2 ... intermittent: average of three P312
continuous: actual value (2111) P776
(average value with Id at intermittent limit
6 sampling values Id
of the current Id at intermittent
firing cycle) limit
*2) K119:= 0 at detected commutation failure,
Id K117 *1) P140 P141 P776
on return (if K120 > 0)
R_in L_in |Id| K116 (150°)
network voltage failure (if K120 < 0)
K119:= -0,006%, if all conditions are P142 P143
fulfilled that prevent reg. feedback R_regen L_regen
on P797=xx1x K116 K115
Sheet 2

06.01
06.01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Analog output CUR
Figure 4.4.3
Analog output CUR
P655
CU-AA actual values P656 P657
CU-AA gain CU-AA offset
DAC Hardware filtering
... ... to terminal block

... 3 # +10 V
2 Parameter value [%]
... UOFF = x (Gain [V] + Offset [V])
1
U 100%
Contents of parameter 001
0 0 -10 V
20 ms
ENGLISH
4-49
Start-Up
1 2 3 4 5 6 8
4-50
7
Start-Up
All grey-hatched background fields can be changed via the control word.
Figure 4.4.4
This is described in Figure 4.4.4.
P590
.i002
ENGLISH
Q.Grund/Reserve
Base / reserve setting (Bas/Res) .i001 Control word bit 30
RESV
Parameters involved: GRND 1
P486, P554 to P557, P561, P565 to P569 0
Selecting the data sets

P571 to P575, P578, P579, P586 to P589
.i004 P578 P579

Reserve data set selection (RDS) .i003 Q. RDS Bit 0 Q. RDS Bit 1
.i002 Control word bit 18 Control word bit 19
Parameters involved: .i001
RDS 4
P140 to P144, RDS 3
RDS 2 3
P160, P161, P310 to P320, P329, RDS 1 2
P408, P517, P518, 1
P773 to P777 0
P579 P578 Index

0 0 .i001
0 1 .i002
1 0 .i003
1 1 .i004

06.01
06.01 Start-Up
4.5 Starting up optional supplementary boards

For installation of the board, see Section 9.1, Options for integration into the electronics box. The unit only
supports 1 optional board of each type.
All communication-related settings must be made using parameters.
The supplementary boards must then be logged in the unit via P090 or P091. Otherwise they will be ignored by
the unit and no communication will take place.
4.5.1 Procedure for starting up technology boards

(T100, T300, T400):
NOTE
Freely configurable technology boards T300 and T400 are guaranteed to operate correctly (board runup and
data exchange with the SIMOVERT 6SE70). The user, however, must bear responsibility for ensuring that the
system is properly configured.
1 Disconnect the power supply and insert the board in location 2.
2 After the next switch-on, the board must be logged in via P090. The parameters of the technology board
(d and H parameters, in some cases also c and L parameters) can then be accessed.
The connections for the process data on the basic unit are made using the corresponding source and
target connections (see Section 4.3).
For the meaning of the bits in the control words and the status words, see Section 4.3.
If a communication board is used in addition to a technology board, then data are exchanged with the
basic converter via the technology board. The basic converter cannot directly access the data of the
communication board. The connections for the process data to be transferred are then determined by the
configuration or parameter settings of the technology board.
If a technology board is mounted in location 2, then only one communication board (CBC, CBD, CBP2,
SCB1, SCB2) may be installed in slot G. Other boards are not supported

Start-Up 06.01
4.5.2 Sequence of operations for starting up PROFIBUS boards

(CBP2):
1 Switch off the power supply and insert the board or adapter with board. For installation details see Section
9.1, Options for integration into the electronics box.
2 The following are important communication parameters:
- P697 PPO type, definition of the number of words in the parameter and process data section of the
telegram (required only if the PPO type cannot be set via PROFIBUS-DP master)
- P695 Telegram failure time for process data (0 = deactivated)
The DP master configuring data determine whether the slave (CBP2) must monitor telegram
traffic with the master. If this monitoring function is activated, the DP master passes a time value
(watchdog time) to the slave when the link is set up. If no data are exchanged within this period,
the slave terminates the process data exchange with the SIMOVERT 6SE70. The latter can
monitor the process data as a function of P695 and activate fault message F082
- P918 Busadresse
- P053 Parameterization enable (same function as P927; need only be set if parameters are to be
assigned via PROFIBUS)
- P090 or P091 for logging the board
The connections for the process data on the communications board are made using the corresponding
source and target parameters (see Section 4.3). For the meaning of the bits in the control words and the
status words, see Section 4.3.
3 Switching off and on of the electronics supply voltage. Doing this causes the values of parameters P695,
P697 and P918 to be transferred from the supplementary board.
The CBP2 (Communication Board PROFIBUS) serves to link drives and higher-level automation systems via the
PROFIBUS-DP. For the purpose of PROFIBUS, it is necessary to distinguish between master and slave
converters.
Masters control the data traffic via the bus and are also referred to as active nodes. There are two
classes of master:
DP masters of class 1 (DPM1) are central stations (e.g. SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7 or SIMADYN D)
which exchange data with slaves in predefined message cycles.
DPM1s support both a cyclic channel (transmission of process data and parameter data) and an acyclic
channel (transmission of parameter data and diagnostic data).
DP masters of class 2 (DPM2) are programming, configuring or operator control/visualization devices
(e.g. SIMOVIS) which are used in operation to configure, start up or monitor the installation.
DPM2s support only an acyclic channel for transferring parameter data.
The contents of the data frames transferred via these channels are identical to the structure of the
parameter section (PKW) as defined by the USS specification.

06.01 Start-Up
The following diagram shows the services and channels supported by a CBP2:
CPU SIMOVIS
(Class 1 master) (Class 2 master)
MSCY_C1 MSAC_C2 MSAC_C2

Cyclic channel Acyclic channel Acyclic channel
PPO DS 0 DS 100
PKW PZD Diagnosis PKW PKW PZD
Job/ Setpoint/ Job/ Job/ Setpoint/
response actual values response response actual values
Parameter channel Process data channel
Slaves (e.g. CBP, CB1) may only respond to received messages and are referred to as passive nodes.
PROFIBUS (Process Field Bus) combines high baud rates (to RS485 standard) with simple, low-cost
installation. The PROFIBUS baud rate can be selected within a range of 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud and is set for all
devices connected to the bus when the bus system is started up.
The bus is accessed according to the token-passing method, i.e. permission to transmit for a defined time
window is granted to the active stations (masters) in a "logical ring". The master can communicate with other
masters, or with slaves in a subordinate master-slave process, within this time window.
PROFIBUS-DP (Distributed Peripherals) predominantly utilizes the master-slave method and data is exchanged
cyclically with the drives in most cases.
The user data structure for the cyclic channel MSCY_C1 (see picture above) is referred to as a Parameter
Process(data) Object (PPO) in the PROFIBUS profile for variable-speed drives. This channel is also frequently
referred to as the STANDARD channel.
The user data structure is divided into two different sections which can be transferred in each telegram:
PZD section
The process data (PZD) section contains control words, setpoints, status words and actual values.
PKW section
The parameter section (PKW - Parameter ID Value) is used to read and write parameter values.
When the bus system is started up, the type of PPO used by the PROFIBUS master to address the drive is
selected. The type of PPO selected depends on what functions the drive has to perform in the automation
network.
Process data are always transferred and processed as priority data in the drive.
Process data are "wired up" by means of connectors of the basic unit (drive) or via technology board
parameters, if these are configured.
Parameter data allow all parameters of the drive to be accessed, allowing parameter values, diagnostic
quantities, fault messages, etc. to be called by a higher-level system without impairing the performance of the
PZD transmission.

Start-Up 06.01
A total of five PPO types are defined:

PKW section PZD section
PKE IND PWE PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD
STW HSW 10
1 HIW
ZSW
1
st nd rd th st nd rd th th th th th th th
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
word word word word word word word word word word word word word word
PPO
1
PPO
2
PPO
3
PPO
4
PPO
5
PKW: Parameter ID value IND: Index ZSW Status word

PZD: Process data PWE: Parameter value HSW: Main setpoint
PKE: Parameter identifier STW: Control word ISW: Main actual value
The acyclic channel MSCY_C2 (see diagram above) is used exclusively for the start-up and servicing of
SIMOVIS.
4.5.2.1 Mechanisms for processing parameters via the PROFIBUS:
The PKW mechanism (with PPO types 1, 2 and 5 and for the two acyclic channels MSAC_C1 and MSAC_C2)
can be used to read and write parameters. A parameter request job is sent to the drive for this purpose. When
the job has been executed, the drive sends back a response. Until it receives this response, the master must not
issue any new requests, i.e. any job with different contents, but must repeat the old job.
The parameter section in the telegram always contains at least 4 words:
Parameter identifier Index Parameter value 1 Paramter value 2

PKE IND PWE1 (H word) PWE2 (L word)
Details about the telegram structure can be found in Section 4.5.6, "Structure of request/response telegrams“.
The parameter identifier PKE contains the number of the relevant parameter and an identifier which
determines the action to be taken (e.g. "read value").
The index IND contains the number of the relevant index value (equals 0 in the case of nonindexed
parameters). The IND structure differs depending on the communication mode:
- Definition in the PPOs (structure of IND with cyclical communication via PPOs)
- Definition for acyclical channels MSAC_C1 and MSAC_C2 (structure of IND with acyclical communication)
The array subindex (referred to simply as "subindex" in the PROFIBUS profile) is an 8-bit value which is
transferred in the high-order byte (bits 8 to 15) of the index (IND) when data are transferred cyclically via
PPOs. The low-order byte (bits 0 to 7) is not defined in the DVA profile. The low-order byte of the index word is
used in the PPO of CBP2 to select the correct number range (bit7 = Page Select bit) in the case of parameter
numbers of > 1999).
In the case of acyclical data traffic (MSAC_C1, MSAC_C2) the number of the index is transferred in the low-
order byte (bits 0 to 7). Bit 15 in the high-order byte is used as the Page Select bit. This assignment complies
with the USS specification.
Index value 255 (request applies to all index values) is meaningful only for acyclical transmission via MSAC_C1.
The maximum data block length is 206 bytes with this transmission mode.

06.01 Start-Up
The parameter value PWE is always transferred as double word (32-bit value) PWE1 and PWE2. The high-
order word is entered as PWE1 and the low-order word as PWE2. In the case of 16-bit values, PWE1 must be
set to 0 by the master.
Example
Read parameter P140.004 (for details, see Section 4.5.6, "Structure of request/response telegrams“):
Request identifier PKE = 0x608C (request parameter value (array) P101),
Index IND = 0004h = 4d
Parameter value PWE1 = PWE2 = 0
SIMOVERT response:
Response identifier PKE = 0x408C,
Index IND = 0004h = 4d
Value of P140.004 = 1388h = 5000d, i.e. 5.000Ω (PWE1 = 0, because it is not a double word parameter)
Rules for job/response processing:

A job or a response can only ever refer to one parameter.
The master must send the job repeatedly until it receives an appropriate response from the slave. The
master recognizes the response to the job it has sent by analysing the response identifier, the parameter
number, the parameter index and the parameter value.
The complete job must be sent in one telegram. The same applies to the response.
The actual values in repeats of response telegrams are always up-to-date values.
If no information needs to be fetched via the PKW interface (but only PZD) in cyclic operation, then a "No
job" job must be issued.
PROFIBUS devices have a variety of difference performance features. In order to ensure that all master
systems can correctly address each supplementary board, the characteristic features of each board are stored in
a separate device master file (GSD).
You need file <siem8045.gsd> for CBP2.
The appropriate file can be chosen in the selection menu for the SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES files in later
versions of the configuring tool.
If a device master file is not available in the menu, it can be collected from an Internet site. The Internet address
is http://www.ad.siemens.de/support/html_76/index.shtml.
Product Support/PROFIBUS GSD files/Drives/ . Have all entries displayed using the search function and click on
the search results.
SIMOVERT/SIMOREG/SIMADYN CBP
File: siem8045.gsd
The communication boards can only be operated on a non-Siemens master as a DP standard slave, the
corresponding GSD file containing all necessary information for this mode.
Detailed information about communication via PROFIBUS can be found in Section 8.2 of the compendium for
SIMOVERT MASTER DRIVES Motion Control (order no. 6SE7080-0QX50).
4.5.2.2 Diagnostic tools:
LED displays of CBP2 (flashing LEDs mean normal operation):

Red LED Status of CBP2
Yellow LED Communication between SIMOVERT and CBP2
Green LED Communication between CBP2 and PROFIBUS

Start-Up 06.01
As a start-up support tool, the PROFIBUS board supplies data which can be displayed in r731.001 to r731.032.
The values of the indices are as follows:
Index Meaning for CBP/CBP2
001 CBP_Status
Bit0: "CBP Init", CBP is being initialized or waiting to be initialized by the basic unit
(not set in normal operation)
Bit1: "CBP Online", CBP is selected by basic unit
(set in normal operation)
Bit2: "CBP Offline", CBP not selected by basic unit
Bit3: Illegal bus address (P918)
Bit4: Diagnostic mode activated (P696 <> 0)
Bit8: Incorrect identifier bytes transferred (incorrect configuring message from PROFIBUS Master)
Bit9: Incorrect PPO type (incorrect configuring message from PROFIBUS Master)
Bit10: Correct configuring data received from PROFIBUS_DP Master (set in normal operation)
Bit12: Fatal error detected by DPS Manager software (not set in normal operation)
Bit13: Program in endless loop in main.c (loop can only be exited by a Reset)
Bit15: Program in communications online loop (loop can only be exited through re-initialization by basic unit)
002 SPC3_Status
Bit0: Offline/Passive Idle
(0=SPC3 is operating in normal mode (offline)
1=SPC3 is operating in Passive Idle)
Bit2: Diag flag
(0=diagnostic buffer has been picked up by master
1= diagnostic buffer has not been picked up by master)
Bit3: RAM Access Violation, memory access >1.5kB
(0=no address violation, 1=for addresses > 1536 bytes, 1024 is subtracted from address and access
made to the new address)
Bit4+5: DP state (00=Wait_Prm, 01=Wait_Cfg, 10=Data_Ex, 11=not possible)
Bit6+7: WD state (00=Baud search, 01=Baud_Control, 10=DP_Control, 11=not possible)
Bit8-11: Baud rate (0000=12MBd, 0001=6MBd, 0010=3MBd, 0011=1,5MBd, 0100=500kBd, 0101=187.5kBd,
0110=93.75kBd, 0111=45.45kBd, 1000=19.2kBd, 1001=9.6kBd)
Bit12-15: SPC3-Release (0000=Release 0)
003 SPC3_Global_Controls
Bits remain set until the next DP global command
Bit1: 1=Clear_Data message received
Bit2: 1=Unfreeze message received
Bit3: 1=Freeze message received
Bit4: 1=Unsync message received
Bit5: 1=Sync message received
004 L byte: No. of received error-free messages (DP Standard only)

H byte: Reserved
005 L byte: "Timeout" counter
H byte: Reserved
006 L byte: "Clear Data" counter
H byte: Reserved
007 L byte: "Heartbeat counter error" counter
H byte: Reserved
008 L byte: No. bytes for special diagnosis
H byte: Reserved
009 L byte: Mirroring of slot identifier 2
H byte: Mirroring of slot identifier 3

06.01 Start-Up
Index Meaning for CBP/CBP2

010 L byte: Mirroring of P918 (CB bus addr.)
H byte: Reserved
011 L byte: "Re-config. by CUD" counter
H byte: "Initialization runs" counter
012 L byte: Error ID DPS manager error
H byte: Reserved
013 L byte: PPO type found
H byte: Reserved
014 L byte: Mirroring of "DWord specifier ref"
015 H byte: Mirroring of "DWord specifier act"
016 L byte: DPV1:DS_Write, pos. ack. counter
H byte: Reserved
017 L byte: DPV1:DS_Write, neg. ack. counter
H byte: Reserved
018 L byte: DPV1:DS_Read, pos. ack. counter
H byte: Reserved
019 L byte: DPV1:DS_Read, neg. ack. counter
H byte: Reserved
020 L byte: DP/T:GET DB99 pos. ack. counter
H byte: DP/T:PUT DB99 pos. ack. counter
021 L byte: DP/T:GET DB100 ps. ack. counter
H byte: DP/T:PUT DB100 ps. ack. counter
022 L byte: DP/T:GET DB101 ps. ack. counter
H byte: DP/T:PUT DB101 ps. ack. counter
023 L byte: DP/T service neg. acknow. counter
H byte: DP/T:Application association pos. acknow. counter
024 Reserved
025 Date of creation: Day, month
026 Date of creation: Year
027 Software version (Vx.yz, display x)
028 Software version (Vx.yz, display yz)
029 Software version: Flash-EPROM checks.
030 Reserved
031 Reserved
032 Reserved
Fault and alarm messages:
For details about fault messages, see Section 7.

Fault F080
An error occurred as board CBP2 was being initialized, e.g. incorrect value of a CB parameter, incorrect
bus address or defective module.
Fault F081
The heartbeat counter (counter on CBP2) which is monitored by SIMOVERT 6SE70 for "signs of life" from
the board has not changed for at least 800 ms.
Fault F082
Failure of PZD telegrams or a fault in the transmission channel.

Start-Up 06.01
Alarm A081
The identifier byte combinations transmitted by the DP master in the configuration telegram do not match
the permitted identifier byte combinations (configuring error on DP master)
Effect: No link can be established with the DP master, reconfiguration necessary.
Alarm A082
No valid PPO type can be determined from the configuration telegram from the DP master.
Effect: No link can be established with the DP master, reconfiguration necessary.
Alarm A083
No user data, or only invalid data, are being received from the DP master.
Effect: The process data are not transferred to the basic unit. When the telegram failure monitoring
function is active (P695 set to value other than 0), this disturbance generates fault message F082 with
fault value 10.
Alarm A084
The exchange of data between the communication board and DP master has been interrupted (e.g. cable
break, bus connector removed or DP master switched off).
Effect: When the telegram failure monitoring function is active (P695 set to value other than 0), this
disturbance generates fault message F082 with fault value 10
Alarm A085
Error in the DPS software of the communication board.
Effect: Fault message F081 is generated.
Alarm A086
Failure of heartbeat counter detected by SIMOVERT 6SE70.
Effect: Interruption in communication with PROFIBUS.
Alarm A087
DP slave software has detected serious fault, fault number in diagnostic parameter n731.08.
Effect: Total communication failure (secondary fault F082).
Alarm A088
At least 1 configurable internode transmitter is not yet active or has failed again (for details, see diagnostic
parameter n731).
Effect:If a transmitter is not yet active, the associated setpoints are set to "0" as an alternative. If an
internode transmitter fails again, transmission of the setpoints to the SIMOVERT 6SE70 may be
interrupted depending on the setting of P700 (with secondary fault F082).

06.01 Start-Up
4.5.3 Sequence of operations for starting up CAN bus boards (CBC):
1 With the power supply switched off, insert the board with adapter board (ADB) into the slot. For installation
details see Section 9.1, Options for integration into the electronics box.
2 The following are important communication parameters:

P696 Basic identifier for PKW request/PKW response
P697 Basic identifier for PZD receive
P698 Basic identifier for PZD transmit
P699 No. of the PZD for PZD transmit
P700 Refreshment rate for PZD transmit
P701 Basic identifier for PZD receive broadcast
P702 Basic identifier for PZD receive multicast
P703 Basic identifier for PZD receive lateral communication
P704 Basic identifier for PKW request broadcast
P705 Baud rate, when P706.002 = 0:
0=10kBit/s, 1=20kBit/s, 2=50kBit/s, 3=100kBit/s, 4=125kBit/s, 5=250kBit/s, 6=500kBit/s,
7=reserved, 8=1MBit/s
P706.01 0 = functionality corresponding to layer 2 of the ISO OSI 7-layer model (CANopen is not
supported by the SIMOVERT 6SE70 rectifier/regenerative feedback unit
P706.02 Bus timing (this should not be changed)
P695 Telegram failure time (0 = deactivated)
P918 Bus address (node ID)
P053, P927 Parameterization enable (need only be set if parameter values are to be altered via the
CAN bus)
P090 or P091 Logging the board
The connections for the process data on the communications board are made using the corresponding
source and target parameters (see Section 4.3). For the meaning of bits in the control words and the
status words, see Section 4.3.
3 Switching off and on of the electronics supply voltage. Doing this causes the values of parameters P696
to P706 and P918 to be transferred from the supplementary board.
The CAN (Controller Area Network) fieldbus is being used increasingly for industrial applications in spite of its
limited network length (max. 40 m with a data transmission rate of 1 Mbaud).
Data are transferred by means of telegrams. Each data message, the so-called COBs (Communication
Objects), has its own individual identifier and contains a maximum of 8 bytes of user data. The CBC board uses
the Standard Message Format with 11-bit identifier. Simultaneous use by other nodes of Extended Message
Format with 29-bit identifiers is tolerated, but messages with this format are not evaluated.
Nodes on the bus determine from the identifier which telegrams apply to them. The COBs to be sent and
received by each node must be defined before data transmission commences.
The identifiers also determine bus accessing priority. Low identifiers gain faster access to the bus, i.e. they have
higher priority then high identifiers.
Errored telegrams can be reliably detected by means of a number of interactive error detection mechanisms. A
transmission is automatically repeated when errors are detected.
The figure below shows a diagram of the CAN architecture model that is oriented toward the ISO-OSI-7 layer
reference model. The CBC supports the functionalities provided by layers 2 and 7 of this model.

Start-Up 06.01
Functionality according to layer 2

The user data from the user software (as COBs on byte level) must be transferred directly to layer 2 (see also
the examples of PZD and PKW data exchange given further down).
Functionality according to layer 7 (CANopen)
CANopen is not supported by the SIMOVERT 6SE70 rectifier unit.
CAN protocol Device Net

Device profile Device net
Application specification
Communication CIA includes:
profile DS 301 - Device profile
CIA CAL – Communication
DS 201 .. 205, 207 profile
Layer 7 Application layer – Application layer
CANopen
CAL
Layer 3-6
Communication Layer 2 Data link layer ISO-DIS 11898
Physical layer,
electrical
Layer 1
Physical layer, CIA DS 102-1 Device Net ODVA
mechanical
4.5.3.1 Description of CBC with CAN Layer 2
User data are exchanged between the CAN master and the CAN boards on the drives, i.e. the slaves. User data
are categorized as either process data (control and status information, setpoints and actual values) or data
which relate to parameters.
Process data (PZDs) are time-critical and therefore processed faster by the drive (every 3.3 ms at system
frequency of 50 Hz) than the non-time-critical PKW data (parameter identifier value), which is processed by the
drive every 20 ms.
All settings required to operate the communication board are made in drive parameters.
Process data (PZD) are categorized as either data received by the drive (control words and setpoints: PZD
Receive) or data transmitted by the drive (status words and actual values: PZD Send). A maximum of 16 PZDs
can be transferred in either direction; these are divided into COBs with 4 data words each by the communication
board. In other words, 4 COBs are required to transfer 4 PZD words, with each COB requiring its own separate
identifier. Identifiers are assigned in the CB parameters as shown in the following diagram:
PZD Receive 1 (setpoints 1 to 4)
Node address
of drive (P918) PZD Receive 2 (setpoints 5 to 8)
x4 + +1
Basic identifier for parameterizing PZD Receive 3 (setpoints 9 to 12)

PZD Receive (U712) +2
PZD Receive 4 (setpoints 13 to 16)

+3
Example of PZD Receive:

P918 = 1 This settings assigns identifier 100 to the first 4 receive PZDs,
P697 = 96 identifier 101 to the second 4 receive PZDs, etc.

06.01 Start-Up
PZD Send 1 (actual values 1 to 4)
Node address
of drive (P918) PZD Send 2 (actual values 5 to 8)
x4 + +1
Basic identifier for PZD Send 3 (actual values 9 to 12)

PZD send (U713) +2
PZD-Send 4 (actual values 13 to 16)

+3
Example of PZD Send:

P918 = 1 This setting assigns identifier 200 to the first 4 send PZDs,
P698 = 196 identifier 201 to the second 4 send PZDs, etc.
How received data are utilized by the drive or which data are to be sent by the drive is determined by connectors.
3 different modes of COB transmission can be selected in CB parameter 5 (P700):
P700 = 0 Actual values are transmitted only on request (Remote Transmission Requests)
P700 = 1 to 65534 Actual values are transmitted after the set time [ms] or on request (Remote
Transmission Requests)
P700 = 65535 Actual values are transmitted if the values have changed (event) or on request
(Remote Transmission Requests). This option should only be used in cases where
values seldom change so as to prevent excessive bus loading.
Structure of a telegram for PZD data exchange:

The telegram consists of the following data words:
Identifier Process data word 1 Process data word 2 Process data word 3 Process data word 4
ID PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4
ID is the CAN identifier that is defined for the COB in question by parameterization.
PZDx are process data words
Example of a PZD setpoint telegram:

Using the receive identifier of the above example
Receive identifier 140d 008Ch
1. Setpoint 40063d 9C7Fh control word 1
2. Setpoint 8192d 2000h 50%
3. Setpoint 123d 007Bh
4. Setpoint 0d 0h
Using the CAN BusAnalyser++ from Steinbeis, the setpoint data appear as follows (data field length = 8
bytes, low and high bytes are shown swapped round):
Identifier Data field

64 00 7F 9C 00 20 7B 00 00 00
ID PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4

Start-Up 06.01
The following functions are also available, each allowing a maximum of 16 process data to be transferred:
PZD Receive Broadcast
This function is used to send setpoints and control words from the master to all slaves on the bus
simultaneously. With this option, an identical identifier must be set on all slaves utilizing the function. This
common identifier is set in CB parameter 6 (P701). The first 4 PZDs are transferred with the value set in
P701 and the second 4 PZDs with the value in P701+1, etc.
PZD Receive Multicast
This function is used to send setpoints and control words from the master to a group of slaves on the
bus simultaneously. With this option, all slaves within the group using the function must be set to an
identical identifier. This group identifier is set in CB parameter 7 (P702). The first 4 PZDs are transferred
with the value set in 702 and the second 4 PZDs with the value in 702+1, etc.
PZD Receive Internode
This function is used to receive setpoints and control words from another slave, allowing PZDs to be
exchanged between drives without intervention by a CAN master. For this purpose, the identifier of PZD
Receive Internode on the receiving slave must be set to the identifier of PZD Send on the transmitting
slave. This identifier is set in CB parameter 8 (P703). The first 4 PZDs are transferred with the value set in
P703 and the second 4 PZDs with the value in P703+1, etc.
Notes regarding PZD transmission:

Control word 1 must always be transferred as the first PZD word for setpoints. If control word 2 is needed,
then it must be transferred as the fourth PZD word.
Bit 10 (control by PLC) must always be set in control word 1 or else the drives will not accept setpoints
and control words.
The consistency of process data can only be guaranteed within a COB. If more than 4 data words are
needed, these must be divided among several COBs. Since drives accept the data asynchronously, the
data transferred in several COBs may not always be accepted and processed in the same processing
cycle.
For this reason, interrelated data should be transferred within the same COB. If this is not possible, data
consistency can be assured by means of control word bit 10 (control by PLC), i.e. by setting the bit to "off"
in the first COB to temporarily prevent the drive from accepting the data from the communications board.
The remaining data are then transmitted. Finally, a COB containing a control word bit 10 set to "on" is
transmitted. Since a drive can accept up to 16 PZDs simultaneously from the communication board, data
consistency is assured.
Since a variety of different functions can be used to transfer PZDs simultaneously, data are overlayed in
the drive. For example, the first PZD from PZD Receive and PZD Receive Broadcast are always
interpreted as the same control word 1. For this reason, care should be taken to ensure that data are
transferred in meaningful combinations.
Two CAN identifiers are required for the purpose of processing parameters, i.e. one CAN identifier for PKW
Request (parameter request job to drive) and one CAN identifier for PKW Response (parameter response by
drive). These assignments are made in CB parameters as shown in the following diagram:
Node address
of drive (P918) PKW Request
x2 +
Basic identifier for PKW Response

parameterizing (U711) +1
Example of PKW data exchange:

P918 = 1 This setting assigns identifier 300 to the parameter job (request)
P696 = 298 and identifier 301 to the parameter response.

06.01 Start-Up
Structure of a telegram for PKW data exchange:

The telegram consists of the following data words:
Identifier Parameter identifier Parameter index Parameter value 1 Parameter value 2

ID PKE IND PWE1 PWE2
ID is the CAN identifier that is defined for the COB in question by parameterization.
PKE contains the request or response ID and the parameter number
Request or response ID Parameter number

PNU
Bit 0 to bit 10 contain the number of the parameter concerned. Bit 12 to bit 15 contain the request or
response ID.
The index IND contains the value 0 for unindexed parameters, for indexed parameters it contains the
corresponding index value. Bit15 also has a special function as the page select bit for parameter numbers
greater than 1999.
The index value 255 means that the request concerns all indices of the parameter in question. For a
change request, the parameter values must then be passed on for all indices of the parameter. Because a
COB can only contain up to 4 data words (8 bytes) of net data, use of this request is only possible for
parameters with (up to ) 2 indices. In the other direction, the drive supplies all index values in the response
telegram to a read request.
Details about the telegram structure can be found in Section 4.5.6, "Structure of request/response
telegrams“.
Example of a PKW request:

Changing the parameter value of the indexed parameter P140.02 (in the RAM) to 5.000Ω.
The example telegram therefore contains the following values:
Request identifier 300d 012Ch for use of the IDs of the example above
Request code 7d 7h "Change parameter value (array word)"
Parameter number 140d 008Ch => PKE = 708Ch
Index 2d 0002h
Parameter value 5000d 1388h 3 decimal places (value = 5000)
Using the CAN BusAnalyser++ from Steinbeis, the transmit data appear as follows (data field length = 8
bytes, low and high bytes are shown swapped round):
Identifier Data field

2C 01 8C 70 02 00 88 13 00 00
ID PKE IND PWE1
The following transfer function is also available:

PKW Request Broadcast
A parameter job (request) is processed simultaneously by all slaves on the bus. The node address is not
used to generate the CAN identifier because this must be set identically on all slaves utilizing the PKW
Request Broadcast function. This common identifier is set in CB parameter 9 (P704). The corresponding
parameter response is made with the CAN identifier for PKW Response described above
Notes regarding PKW transmission:

The length of the job and the response is always 4 words. Jobs which apply to all indices of a parameter
(e.g. "Request all indices") are not possible.
As a general rule, the low-order byte (in words) or the low-order word (in double words) is transferred first.
SIMOVERT 6SE70 does not use double word parameters itself, these jobs can only be executed where
access is available to technology board parameters (e.g. T400).

Start-Up 06.01
The CBC does not respond to a parameter request job until the drive data are available. This normally
takes 20 ms. The response times will be longer only if change (write) jobs including storage of the value in
the EEPROM are received from other sources (e.g. serial basic converter interface), resulting in a delay in
job execution
In certain system states (e.g. initialization states), parameter processing is greatly delayed or does not
take place at all.
The master may not issue a new parameter request job until any current parameter job has been
acknowledged.
LED displays on the CBC (flashing LEDs indicate normal operation):

Red LED Status of CBC
Yellow LED Communication between SIMOVERT and CBC
Green LED Communication between CBC and CAN Bus
LED
Status
red yellow green
flashing flashing flashing Normal operation

flashing off on CBC waiting for commencement of initialization by SIMOVERT
flashing on off CBC waiting for end of initialization by SIMOVERT
flashing flashing off No PZD data exchange via CAN Bus
flashing on on CBC defective
Diagnostic parameter r731:
Value Meaning
r731.001 0 No fault
Fault F080/fault value 5 is displayed under fault conditions:
Fault values for CAN layer 2:

1 Incorrect address on CAN Bus (P918 / slave address)
2 Incorrect CAN identifier with PKW Request (P696)
5 Incorrect CAN identifier with PKW Request-Broadcast (P704)
7 Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive (P697)
13 Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Transmit (P698)
14 PZD transmit length = 0 (P699)
15 PZD transmit length > 16 , i.e. too long (P699)
20 Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive-Broadcast (P701)
21 Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive-Multicast (P702)
22 Incorrect CAN identifier with PZD Receive-Internode (P703)
23 Invalid baud rate (P705)
35 Incorrect CAN protocol type (P706)
36 PKW Request-Broadcast (P704) without PKW Request (P696)
48 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PKW Broadcast
49 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive
50 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Transmit
51 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive-Broadcast
52 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive-Multicast
53 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW and PZD Receive-Internode
54 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive
55 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Transmit
56 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive-Broadcast
57 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive-Multicast
58 Overlap between CAN identifier PKW Broadcast and PZD Receive-Internode
59 Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Transmit
60 Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Receive-Broadcast
61 Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Receive-Multicast
62 Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive and PZD Receive-Internode
63 Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Transmit and PZD Receive-Broadcast
64 Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Transmit and PZD Receive-Multicast
65 Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Transmit and PZD Receive Internode
66 Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive-Broadcast and PZD Receive-Multicast
67 Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive-Broadcast and PZD Receive-Internode

06.01 Start-Up
Value Meaning
68 Overlap between CAN identifier PZD Receive-Multicast and PZD Receive-Internode
Fault values for CANopen:
1 Incorrect bus address (P918)
23 Invalid baud rate (P705)
35 Incorrect CAN protocol type (P706)
257 Invalid mapping of 1st Receive PDO (P696)
st
258 Invalid transmission type of 1 Receive PDO (P696)
st
273 Invalid mapping of 1 Transmit PDO (P700)
st
274 Invalid transmission type of 1 Transmit PDO (P700)
nd
513 Invalid mapping of 2 Receive PDO (P697)
nd
nd
nd
rd
rd
rd
rd
th
th
th
th
1092 Invalid Life Time Event or incorrect basic unit parameterized (P704)
r731.002 Number of correctly received PZD CAN telegrams since Power ON
r731.003 Number of PZD telegrams lost since Power ON
Telegrams will be lost if the CAN Bus master sends PZD telegrams faster than they can
be processed by the slave.
r731.004 Counter of Bus Off states since Power ON (alarm A084)
r731.005 Counter of Error Warning states since Power ON (alarm A083)
r731.010 Number of correctly transmitted PZD CAN telegrams since Power ON
r731.011 Number of errors during transmission of PZD telegrams
PZD telegrams cannot be transmitted when the bus is overloaded
r731.014 Number of correctly processed PKW requests and responses since Power ON
r731.015 Number of PKW request processing errors, e.g. owing to bus overload or missing
responses from CUD1 (see below for error type)
r731.016 Type of PKW request processing error:
0 No error
9 Error transmitting the PKW response (while waiting for a free channel)
11 Timeout waiting for the PKW response from the CUD1
12 Timeout waiting for a free channel (bus overload)
r731.018 Number of lost PKW requests
r731.026 Software version of CBC
(e.g. "12“ = version 1.2, see also r720)
r731.027 Software identifier
(extended software version identifier, see also r722)
r731.028 Date of generation of CBC software
Day (H byte) and month (L byte)
r731.029 Date of generation of CBC software
Year
Fault and alarm messages:

Detailed information about fault messages can be found in Section 7.
Fault F080
An error occurred during initialization of the CBC board, e.g. incorrect setting of a CB parameter, incorrect
bus address or defective board.
Fault F081
The heartbeat counter (counter on CBC) which is monitored by SIMOVERT for "signs of life" from the
board has not changed for at least 800 ms.
Fault F082
Failure of PZD telegrams or a fault in the transmission channel.

Start-Up 06.01
Alarm A083 (Error Warning)

Errored telegrams are being received or sent and the error counter on the supplementary board has
exceeded the alarm limit.
Errored telegrams are ignored. The data most recently transferred remain valid. If the errored telegrams
contain process data, fault message F082 with fault value 10 may be activated as a function of the
telegram failure time set in P695. No fault message is generated for PKW data.
Alarm A084 (Bus Off)
Errored telegrams are being received or sent and the error counter on the supplementary board has
exceeded the fault limit.
Errored telegrams are ignored. The data most recently transferred remain valid. If the errored telegrams
contain process data, fault message F082 with fault value 10 may be activated as a function of the
telegram failure time set in P695. No fault message is generated for PKW data.

06.01 Start-Up
4.5.4 Sequence of operations for starting up the serial I/O board SCB1:
1 With the power supply disconnected, insert the SCB1 board into slot 2 (or, if you have installed a
technology board, into slot 3).
2 Set bus address on SCI using DIP-Fix switch S1 (each SCI slave requires its own address number):
Slave 1 Slave 2
Address number 1 2
Switch setting S1 closed open
3 Mount the interface board(s) on the rail, make the connection to the 24 V power supply and the fiber optic
connection between SCB1 and SCI.
Depending on the type of SCI slaves used and the functions required, the following parameters are
relevant with respect to board operation (for details, see the parameter list in Section 5 and operating
instructions for the boards):
- P660 Configuration of analog inputs of SCI1 slaves
The type of input signal for each input is parameterized via the indices.
- P661 Filter time constant of analog inputs of SCI1 slaves
Filtering of the input signal for each input is parameterized via the indices.
- P662 Offset compensation of analog inputs of SCI1 slaves
The input signal for each input is zero calibrated via the indices.
- P664 Actual value output via analog outputs of SCI1 slaves
A connector number is selected via the indices to define the output quantity at each output.
- P665 Gain of analog outputs of SCI1 slaves
The gain for each output is parameterized via the indices.
- P666 Offset compensation of analog outputs of SCI1 slaves
The output signal for each output is zero calibrated via the indices.
- P682 SCB protocol
Selection of operating mode of the SCB1 board (master for SCI slaves or peer-to-peer
communication via fiber optic cable).
- P684.2 SCB baud rate
Selection of transmission rate at which the peer-to-peer interface of the SCB1 should operate
(P682 = 3).
- P687.2 SCB telegram failure time
Selection of telegram failure time for the peer-to-peer protocol.
- P689.2 SCB peer forwarding
Identifies words in the received peer-to-peer telegram that should be forwarded immediately.
- P690i SCB actual values
Selection of parameter values that should be transmitted via the serial interface of the SCB
board.
- The display parameter r730 (diagnostic information) assists in the correction of problems during start-up.

Start-Up 06.01
4 Switching off and on of the electronics supply voltage. Doing this causes the values of the parameters
listed above to be transferred from the supplementary board.
The optional board SCB1 (Serial Communication Board 1) is used
- as Master of SCI1 and SCI2 slaves (Serial Communication Interface).
- for communication via the peer-to-peer interface.
In both cases, communication between the boards takes place via fiber optic cables (recommended:
Siemens plastic fiber optic cable, CA-1V2YP980/1000,200A or Siemens fiber optic cable with glass core,
CLY-1V01S200/230,10A)
4.5.4.1 SCB1 as master for SCI1 and SCI2
The SCI boards can be used if additional terminals are required or if safe electrical isolation via fiber optic cable
is a mandatory requirement.
This board only allows the SCB1 master to exchange data with the SCI slaves. Data cannot be exchanged
between the SCI slaves themselves.
A maximum of 2 SCIs, of either the same or different types, can be connected to the SCB1.
SCI1 or SCI2 are terminal expansion boards which are mounted on a rail outside the SIMOVERT 6SE70 master
and supplied with 24 V DC voltage (-17% +25%, 1A) from an external source.
The interface boards extend the converter by the following additional inputs/outputs:
SCI1 SCI2
10 binary inputs 16 binary inputs
8 binary outputs 12 binary outputs
3 analog inputs
3 analog outputs
Reception of SCI data by the SCB1 or transmission to the SCIs is synchronized, i.e. the data of two slaves is
received simultaneously or transmitted simultaneously.
Details of the input/output functions and connections can be found in the operating instructions for the boards.
CAUTION
SCI boards have no external enclosure to protect them against direct contact or ingress of
pollutants. To protect them against damage, they must be installed in a housing or in the
control cabinet of a higher-level system.
The maximum permissible length of fiber optic cables is 10m.
An input filter must be fitted for the external power supply of the interface boards.
Ground SCI at X80 using a short lead.
Analog inputs on SCI1: Only the voltage input or the current input may be used for each
channel.
Analog outputs on SCI1: Only the voltage input or the current input may be used for each
channel. The outputs are short-circuit-proof.
The binary driver outputs are short-circuit-proof. Relays may only be connected to these
outputs in conjunction with an external power supply.
The binary relay outputs are not designed for protective separation.
To protect them against static discharge, the boards may only be placed on conductive
surfaces.

06.01 Start-Up
Recommended circuit for connecting SCB1 to SCI1 and SCI2 using fiber optic cables:
SCB1
U121 U125
U425 U421 U435 U431
SCI1 SCI2 24V
X427 X437
WARNING
If the 24 V voltage supply for an SCI slave fails which data are being exchanged
between the SCB1 and an SCI, then the "1" signal applied at a binary input is sent to
the SCB1 or SIMOVERT 6SE70 as an "0" shortly before the power finally fails.
In contrast, the "1" remains applied in the SIMOVERT 6SE70 in the event of an
interruption in the fiber optic connection.
4.5.4.2 SCB1 as peer-to-peer interface
Process data can be passed quickly in a train from unit to unit (between SCB1 master boards) via the peer-to-
peer interface. The transferred data cannot be manipulated (e.g. multiplication by a factor).
LED display on SCB1:

LED on Reset state
LED flashing Normal operation
LED off Error
LED display on SCI1 or SCI2 slave:

LED on Reset state
LED flashing 12Hz frequency No telegram traffic (e.g. fiber optic cable not
connected)
5Hz frequency Faulty telegram traffic (e.g. fiber optic ring
interrupted or other slave has no supply
voltage)
0.5Hz frequency Normal operation
LED off Error
Details about fault or alarm messages which may occur in relation to SCB1 or SCI (F070 to F079 and A049 to
A053) can be found in Section 7.

Start-Up 06.01
4.5.5 Sequence of operations for starting up the board SCB2:
1 With the power supply disconnected, insert the SCB2 board into slot 2 (or, if you have installed a
technology board, into slot 3).
2 The following parameters are important for operation (for details, see parameter list in Section 5 and
operating instructions for the SCB2):
- P682 SCB protocol
Selection of operating mode for the SCB2 interface
- P683.2 SCB bus address
Selection of bus address at which the SCB2 can be addressed via the USS bus (P682 = 1 or 2)
- P684.2 SCB Baud rate
Selection of transmission rate with which the USS interface (P682 = 1 or 2) or peer-to-peer
interface (P682 = 3) of the SCB2 should be operated
- P685.2 SCB PKW number
Selection of number of words (16 bit) of the PKW part in the net data block of the USS telegram
(P682 = 1 or 2)
- P686.2 SCB PZD number
Selection of number of words (16 bit) of the PZD part in the net data block of the USS telegram
(P682 = 1 or 2)
- P687.2 SCB telegram failure time
Selection of telegram failure time for the USS or peer-to-peer protocol
- P689.2 SCB peer forwarding
Identifies words in the received peer-to-peer telegram that should be forwarded immediately
- P690i SCB actual values
Selection of parameter values that should be transmitted via the serial interface of the SCB2
board
- r730i SCB diagnosis
SCB diagnostic information
- The display parameter r730 (diagnostic information) assists in the correction of problems during
commissioning.
3 Switching off and on of the electronics supply voltage. Doing this causes the values of the parameters
listed above to be transferred from the supplementary board.
The optional board SCB2 (Serial Communication Board 2) provides an additional serial interface using
either the USS or peer-to-peer protocol.
With the USS protocol, up to 31 slaves (converters) can be controlled by a master. In this case, the bus
terminating resistors on the last bus node must be connected by closing the switch S1 in order to prevent
transmission faults.
The peer-to-peer protocol allows data to be forwarded quickly from unit to unit (e.g. for implementing a
setpoint cascade).

06.01 Start-Up
4.5.6 Structure of request/response telegrams
There is no basic difference between the useful data area in the request and response telegrams for PROFIBUS
and CAN Bus. The only difference between the two types of bus telegram is in the protocol frame and the
transmission sequence of H and L bytes. The structure of the protocol frame and the transmission sequence of
bytes are therefore described where necessary in the sections containing the start-up description for the
appropriate board.
Each request and each response basically comprises three areas apart from the telegram frame with header
and trailer:
Parameter identifier Index Parameter value

Header Trailer
PKE IND PWE
The parameter identifier (PKE) contains a request or response identifier (i.e. type of request or response) and
the number of the addressed parameter. The spontaneous signaling bit SPM (bit11) is not used on the
SIMOVERT 6SE70 Common Rectifier.

Header Trailer
PKE IND PWE
Task/ response
SPM Parameter number (PNU)
identifier
Bits 0 to 10 contain the number of the parameter specified in the request.
Parameter number (PNU):
Parameter area Displayed Input on OP1S PNU in parameter

number identifier
Basic unit Pxxx, rxxx 0 - 999 0 - 999
Technology board Hxxx, dxxx 1000 - 1999 1000 - 1999

Start-Up 06.01
Bit 12 bis Bit 15 enthalten die Auftragskennung bzw. die dazugehörende Antwortkennung entsprechend der
folgenden Liste:
Request Meaning Response identifier
identifier
positive negative
0 No request 0
1 Request parameter value (word or double word) 1 or 2
2 Modify parameter value (word) 1
3 Modify parameter value (double word) 2
4 Request descriptive element 3
5 Reserved -
6 Request parameter value (array) (word or double word) 4 or 5
7 Modify parameter value (array - word) 4
7 or 8
8 Modify parameter value (array-double word) 5
9 Request number of array elements 6
10 Reserved -
11 Modify parameter value (array-double word) and store in EEPROM 5
12 Modify parameter value (array-word) and store in EEPROM 4
13 Modify parameter value (double word) and store in EEPROM 2
14 Modify parameter value (double word) and store in EEPROM 1
15 Request text 15
If the common rectifier has been unable to process the request, it does not return the associated response
identifier, but error identifier 7 (or 8) instead.
In this case, an error code defining the error in more detail as shown in the following list is returned as a
parameter value:
Error code Meaning
0 Illegal parameter number (PNU) No PNU specified
1 Parameter value cannot be modified Visualization parameter
2 Lower or upper value limit violated
3 Faulty subindex
4 Parameter is not indexed (no array)
5 Parameter is not indexed (no array)
6 Parameter value can only be reset
7 Descriptive element cannot be modified
8 PPO Write (acc. to "Information Report") is not available
9 Parameter description is not available
10 Incorrect access level
11 No parameterizing enable (P927)
12 Keyword missing Key parameter P051 incorrectly set
13 Text cannot be read cyclically
15 No text
16 PPO Write missing
17 Incorrect operating state
19 Value cannot be read cyclically
101 Parameter number currently deactivated
102 Channel not wide enough
103 PKW number incorrect Applies only to serial interfaces

06.01 Start-Up
Error code Meaning

104 Illegal parameter value Applies to BiCo selection parameters
105 Indexed parameter
106 Request not implemented in drive
107 Text cannot be modified
108 Incorrect number of parameter values Applies to "Change all indices" request
The index IND contains a "0" for non-indexed parameters; a 8-bit long index value is entered (in the low-order
byte) for indexed parameters.
Exception: In the case of cyclical PROFIBUS services, the L and H byte sequence is reversed (see "Start-up of
PROFIBUS boards").

Header Trailer
PKE IND PWE
Bit
Index, H byte Index, L byte
15
An index value of 255 means that the request applies to all indices of the relevant parameter. In the case of a
modification request, the parameter values for all indices of the parameter must be transferred. Conversely, the
drive supplies all index values in its response to a read request.
The parameter value PWE is treated like a double word (PWE1 and PWE2). The high word is set to 0 when a
single word is transferred.
Parameter identifier Index Parameter value Trailer

Header
PKE IND PWE
PWE1 PWE2

Start-Up 06.01

06.01 Parameter List
5 Parameter List
Parameter list - Overview
Range of Parameter Function

Numbers
000 Operation Display

001 - 049 General Observation Parameters
050 - 069 General Parameters
070 - 089 Drive Data
090 - 099 Hardware Configuration
100 - 149 DC Link Data
150 - 329 Control
330 - 409 Convenience functions
410 - 549 Setpoint Channel
550 - 649 Control and Status Word
650 - 679 Analog Input/Output
680 - 719 Communications
720 - 759 Diagnostics
760 - 779 Modulator
780 - 799 Factory Parameters
900 - 999 Profile Parameters (Profibus)
NOTE
The software used for the power supply unit is identical to that used for the power supply and regenerative
power supply units of the equipment series 6SE70.
be ignored.

Parameter List 06.01
Parameter list; Summary of the abbreviations

Example:
PNU OP1S - Parameter name Value range Display See
[phys. unit] Indices Modify
* : Conf. Description Selection text Factory (access/
Par. setting status)
P329 Pre-charging time 0 to 9999 4 35)/ BR6)
1) [ms] 5009) 3/ BR7)
Pre-charging time of the DC link
8)
RDS parameter2)
∧ 14)
PNU=149Hex; Type=O2;3) Scaling: 1Hex =
1) An
* under the parameter number means that this is a confirmation parameter, i.e. the modified value does not become active until the
P key is pressed.
2) Abbreviations for indexed parameters
RDS Reserve data set parameter with 4 indices; changeover with control word 2, bits 18 and 19
G/R Parameter with changeover feature for basic and reserve setting in control word 2, bit 30
3) Specification of parameter type
O2 16-bit value without sign
I2 16-bit value with sign
V2 Bit-coded quantity
L2 Nibble-coded quantity
4) Scaling for access via the PKW mechanism

If necessary: Specification of scaling group for process data (PZD)
PZD group PZD scaling

0 or no specification As for PKW scaling
1 4000Hex = 100%
5) Access stage (P051), starting at which a parameter can be modified or displayed
1 Operator input
2 Standard mode
3 Expert mode
4 Factory-set parameters
6) Specification of the operating states in which the parameter can be displayed
7) Specification of the operating states in which the parameter can be displayed
6) 7) Operating states:
U MLFB input o000
H Hardware o002, o004
configuration
A Drive setting o005
B Ready (incl.: fault ) o007, o008, o009,
o010, o011, o012, o021
R (R) Run o014, o015, o018
8) An under the parameter number means that this parameter does not exist with a 6SE70 rectifier unit (P070 (MLFB) 101).
**
9) A factory setting value in brackets means that the specified value only applies for P077=0. See Section 4.3.9.1 "Generate factory setting"
for more details.

PNU OP1S parameter name Value range Display See

* : Conf. Description Selection text Factory- (access /
5.1 Operation display

r000 Operation Display 0 to 21 - 1/UHABR
-
Status display, faults and warnings of the S/F unit
For description, see Chapter 6 Operator control
o014 Run
-- No thyristor bridge in circuit
I Rectifier bridge in circuit
II Regenerative bridge in circuit
o012 Test phase

Wait until the thyristor test and/or earth-fault test has been
completed (Selection function: P353≠0 and/or P354≠0).
Note: The thyristor test can only be conducted if the DC link
voltage is less than 5% of 1.35*P071. Following an ON
command, therefore, wait in operating status o012 until this
condition is satisfied!
o011 Wait for Run enable

Wait for Run enable
o010 Wait for system voltage

Wait until the system voltage has been checked.
or Wait for voltage at power terminals X1-U1, X1-V1, X1-W1
(rectifier bridge)
or Wait for voltage at power terminals X4-1U2, X4-1V2, X4-1W2
(regenerative bridge)
or Wait for checkback signal "System contactor energized"
or Waiting state before energizing the system contactor (Waiting
time P409)
o009 Wait for Ready to Switch On

Wait for Ready to Switch On (OFF1 active)
or Wait until internal OFF state is canceled by an external OFF
command.
o008 Switch-on inhibit; isolation (OFF2)

Wait for acknowledgment of switch-on inhibit by activating the
SWITCH-OFF command
or Isolation implemented (OFF2)
or Wait until a valid USS telegram to SST1 has been received
(only if P687 is set to ≠0)
or Wait until a valid peer-to-peer telegram to SST2 has been
received (only for P688=1, when P687.i003 is set to ≠0)
o007 Fault
A fault message has been received.
o021 Download
A parameter download over SST1 can be executed
o005 Drive settings
o004 Hardware settings
o002 Electronics initialization

The option module electronics are initialized
or The basic unit electronics are initialized
o001 Establish factory setting
o000 Set MLFB
PNU=00Hex; ∧1
Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =


5.2 General observation parameters

r001 Status 0 to 21 - 2/UHABR
Observation parameters for the current status of the S/F unit
0 = Enter MLFB (P070) (U) MLFB-Input

1 = Establish factory setting Init. RFE
2 = Hardware initialization (H) InitHW Conf
4 = Hardware settings (H) HW Config.
5 = Drive system settings (A) System Set.
7 = Fault (B) Fault
8 = Restart inhibit (B) ON Locked
9 = Ready for turn-ON (B) Ready for ON
10 = Wait for system voltage (B) Line Voltage
11 = Ready for operation (B) Ready Oper
12 = Ground fault test (B) GrndFltTest
14 = R/R unit is in operation (R) Operation
15 = Ramp generator decelerating (OFF1) (R) OFF 1
18 = Circuit identification or forming (R) Circuit ID
21 = Download of parameter settings (B) Download
PNU=1Hex; ∧1
r006 DC Bus Volts 0 to 1000 - 2/ BR
[V] -
Actual DC link voltage
PNU=6Hex; ∧1V
Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex =
∧
=
0 - 100% 0 to 16384V
r011 Heatsink Temp -53 to 199 - 3/ BR
[°C] -
Temperature of the heat sink
PNU=0BHex; ∧ 1 °C
Type=I2; Scalling: 1Hex = PZD gr.: 1
∧ +/-100 °C
Analog output: +/-100% =
r012 Base/Reserve 0 to 1 - 2/ BR
-
Base / reserve settings of the process data wiring for control word bits
0: Base setting
1: Reserve setting
∧1
PNU=0CHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
r013 Operat. Hours 3 2/ BR
-
Display of operating hours with firing pulses enabled (Run status).
All times > about 0.1s are taken into account.
i001 = days (0..9999)

i002 = hours (0..24) d
i003 = seconds (0..3600) h
s
The operating hours counter r013 is set to 0 when the factory setting is
established (P052=1).
∧1
PNU=0DHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
r030 Rectifier Volts 0.0 to 1000.0 - 2/ BR
[V] -
Display of the system voltage at the rectifier bridge (phase W-U)
PNU=1EHex; ∧ 0.1 V
∧
=
0 - 100% 0 to 1638.4V
r031 Inverter Volts 0.0 to 1000.0 - 2/ BR
[V] -
Display of the system voltage at the regenerative bridge (average value of
the three phases)
PNU=1FHex; ∧ 0.1 V
∧
=
0 - 100% 0 to 1638.4V


r032 Line Frequency 0.01 to 65.00 - 2/ BR
[Hz] -
Display of the line frequency
PNU=20Hex; ∧ 0.01 Hz,

∧
=
0 - 100% 0 to 50 Hz PZD gr.: 1
r033 Firing Angle 0.0 to 165.0 - 2/ BR
[°el] -
Display of the firing angle
PNU=21Hex; ∧ 0.1 °el,

∧
=
0 - 100% 0°el -180°el PZD gr.: 1
r034 DC Amps (set) -150 to 150 - 3/ BR
[%] -
Display of DC link current setpoint
∧ 0.1 %, ±100% ∧ ±P075

PNU=22Hex; =
PZD gr.: 1
r035 DC Amps (act) -199 to 199 - 2/ BR
[%] -
Display of actual DC link current
∧ 1 %, ± 100% ∧ ± P075
PNU=23Hex; =
PZD gr.: 1
r036 DC Volts (set) 0 to 199 - 3/ BR
[%] -
Display of DC link voltage setpoint
The setpoint 1.35*r030, limited to values of P074 up to 106.8%.
∧ 1 %, 100% ∧ 1.35 P071

PNU=24Hex; = *
PZD gr.: 1
r037 DC Volts (act) 0 to 199 - 2/ BR
[%] -
Display of actual DC link voltage
∧ 1 %, 100% ∧ 1.35 P071

PNU=25Hex; = *
PZD gr.: 1
r038 DC Volts Deviat. -199.9 to 199.9 - 3/ BR
[%] -
Display of setpoint/actual-value deviation of DC link voltage controller
∧ 1 %, 100% ∧ 1.35 P071

PNU=26Hex; = *
PZD gr.: 1
r039 AnalogOut Displ. -112.1 to 112.1 - 2/ BR
[%] -
Display of terminal X102-14 (analog output)
∧ 0.1, ± 100% ∧ ±
Scaling: 1Hex =
PNU=27Hex; Type=O2; =
10V at terminal X102-14
PZD gr.: 1


5.3 General parameters

P050 Language 0 to 4 - 2/UHABR
0 2/ HABR
Display language on the optional operation panel OP
*
0: German 3: Français German
1: English 4: Italiano English
2: Espanol Espanol
Français
Italiano
∧1
PNU=32Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P051 Access Level 1 to 3 - 1/UHABR
2 1/UHABR
Setting of access levels; with higher access levels more parameters can be
* read and/or written.
1: Operating via PMU or OP Operation

2: Standard mode Standard
3: Expert mode Expert
∧1
P052 Function Select 0 to 22 - 2/UHABR
0 2/UHAB
Selection of several commissioning steps and special functions.
* (See Section 4.3.9 for details)
0 = Return from on of the functions described below to the previous Return
status of the R/R unit
1 = Parameter-Reset: all parameters are reset to their original Param.Reset
settings (factory settings).
According to the Profibus profile for variable speed drives this
function is also accessible via parameter P970. After finishing
this function the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
2 = Release for MLFB setting (changing into the status 'MLFB Input MLFB
input'). To exit this function the parameter must be reset to 0.
3 = Upread/Download (Changing into the status Upread/Download
'Upread/Download'). To exit this function the parameter must be
reset to 0. HW Config.
4 = Hardware configuration (Changing into the status 'Hardware
settings'). To exit this function the parameter must be reset to 0.
5 = Drive setting (change to the status "Drive setting" for assigning System Set.
the plant data parameters. To exit this function the parameter
must be reset to 0.
20 = Forming of the DC link FormingCaps
21 = Circuit identification: Assigning the controller parameters of the Circuit ID
R/R unit
22 = Display only parameters with modified values Changed Par
Important: This function can only be used in conjunction with
operator control from the PMU. To exit this function the
parameter must be reset to 0 (Return).
PNU=34Hex; ∧1


P053 Parameter Access 0 to 31 - 1/UHABR
6 1/ HABR
Release of interfaces for parameterization.
* This parameter is also available as P927 in keeping with Profibus Profile
DVA.
0: none
1: COM BOARD (CB)
2: BASE KEYPAD (PMU)
4: BASE SERIAL (SST1) (SST1 and OP)
8: Serial I/O (SCB with USS)) (SCB)
16: TECH BOARD (TB)
Description for Setting:

Every interface is coded by a number.
Input of the number or the total of several numbers which are related to
interfaces, gives parameterization access to these interfaces.
Example:
The factory setting '6' (=4+2) means, that BASE KEYPAD (PMU) and
BASE SERIAL (SST1) have parameterization access.
∧1
P054 Display Light 0 to 1 - 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Backlight for the optional operation panel OP
0 = Backlight always ON always ON
1 = Backlight only ON during operation dur. operat.
∧1
P055 Copy Parameters 011 to 144 - 3/ B
012 3/ B
* This parameter permits the copying of data sets 1, 2, 3 or 4 to data sets 1,
2, 3 or 4.
Only those parameters specified in Section 4.4 "Selecting the data sets"
are affected by the copying process whereby each of these parameters has
4 indices that are assigned to the 4 data sets.
Data set 1 can be set with the parameters Pxxx i001
0xy Do nothing; automatic reset value at the end of a copy

operation
1xy The contents of data set x (x = 1, 2, 3 or 4) are copied to data

set y (y = 1, 2, 3 or 4) (data set x remains unchanged; the
original contents of data set y are overwritten).
x and y are the respective data set numbers (1, 2, 3 or 4) of the
source and destination data set.
Each copy operation is started by changing P055 to parameter mode if

P055 = xy and the unit is not in the "RUN" status. P555 is reset to P055 =
0xy at the end of the copy operation.
Important: Once a copy operation has been started, the electronic

power supply must not be switched off for at least 3 minutes to
enable the copied parameters to be passed to the EEPROM.
P055 is not stored in the EEPROM, and has the value "012" when the
electronic power supply is switched on.
PNU=37Hex; ∧1
Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =


[phys. unit] Indies Modify
Par. setting status
5.4 Drive data

P070 MLFB(6SE70 ... ) 0 to 120 - 3/U BR
Depends on 3/U
MLFB (order number) of the rectifier/regenerating unit
* unit
On POWER ON, the "Bootstrap" function is automatically selected as
long as P070 has not been set!
Enter the code of the corresponding MLFB here (see Section 4.3.9.2)
PNU=46Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex = ∧1
P071 Line Volts 100 to 1000 - 2/ ABR
[V] acc. to P070 2/ A
Line voltage of the rectifier bridge
* RMS value of the rated voltage at which the power section is actually
operated
∧1
P074 Limit LowVoltage 10 to 100 - 2/ BR
[% of P071] 61 2/ BR
Response threshold for undervoltage disconnection and phase failure or
monitoring and threshold for DC link voltage (ssee Section 4.3.10.1). [% of 1.35*P071]
PNU=4AHex; ∧1
P075 Rtd Amps 0.0 to 3276.7 - 2/U BR
[A] acc. to P070 2/U
Rated DC voltage of the R/R unit
* Output DC current (average value) at the power terminals X1-C and X1-D.
∧ 0.1
PNU=4BHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P076 Config. PCircuit 001 to 222 - 3/ ABR
002 3/ A
* Configuration of the power section
xx1 Motoring only

xx2 Motoring and generating possible
00x No parallel power section connected
x1x to x2x Number of additional parallel-connected power sections in
feed direction
0xx to 2xx Number of additional parallel-connected power sections in
recovery direction
The number of parallel feed power sections must be greater than or equal
to the number of parallel recovery power sections:
Permitted configurations: P076= 00x, 01x, 02x, 11x, 12x, 22x
Feed power section(s): E EE EEE EE EEE EEE
Recovery power section(s): R R R RR RR RRR
Correction factor: 1 2 3 1 3/2 1
In recovery direction, calculation of the effective Ud controller gain and
determination of the effective DC link capacitance for the load current
calculation take the above correction factor into account.
PNU=4CHex; Type=L2; ∧1
Scaling: 1Hex =


[phys. unit] Indies Modify
Par. setting status
P077 Factory set. type 0 to 6 - 3/U BR
0 3/U
* Selective factory setting (see Section 4.3.9.1)
The parameter can be modified in the state "MLFB input" (P052=2). There
are two methods for setting the parameters dependent on P077: RRU
1: If a MLFB is not entered (P070=0), once P077 has been entered and
"MLFB input" has been terminated (P052=0), the selected parameter
becomes valid immediately
2: Via the selection "Par.reset" (P052=1 or P970=0), "generate factory
setting" is carried out and the setting of P077 is taken into account. The
values of P070 and P077 will not be changed, but all other parameters
are reset to their factory setting
Parameter values:
0: Factory setting, acc. to "Parameter list", Chapter 5
1: With this setting, the following parameters are initialized differently as
compared to "0"
P554, P555
compared to "0"
P554, P555, P565, P566, P567, P575, P588, P607
compared to "0"
P554, P555, P565, P566, P575, P588, P607
compared to "0"
P486, P554, P555, P561, P565, P566, P567, P572, P575, P583, P587,
P588, 607
compared to "0"
P486, P554, P555, P561, P565, P566, P572, P575, P583, P587, P588,
P607
∧1
PNU=4DHex; Type=02; Scaling: 1Hex =
r089 Module slot1 4 - 3/ B
-
Module in slot 1 (left) in the electronics box.
4 = Module CUR RRU

(Designation: RRU=Rectifying Regenerative Unit)
PNU=59Hex; ∧1
Type=02; Scaling: 1Hex =


5.5 Hardware configuration

P090 Board Position 2 0 to 3 - 3/ HBR
0 3/ H
PCB in position 2 (right) of the electronic box
*
0 = No optional PCBs none
1 = CB Communication Board CB
2 = TB Technology Board TB
3 = SCB Serial Communication Board SCB
Description for Setting:

Only the following combinations of PCBs and positions are admitted:
Position 3(P091) Position 2(P090)

- CB
- TB
- SCB
SCB CB
CB TB
SCB TB
CB SCB
∧1
PNU=5AHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P091 Board Position 3 0 to 3 - 3/ HBR
0 3/ H
PCB in position 3 (center) of the electronic box
* Text as for P090
Description see P090(PCB position 2)
PNU=5BHex; ∧1


5.6 Data of the DC link

P140 Rectifier Resist 0.000 to 32.767 4 3/ BR
[Ω] 0.000 3/ BR
Circuit resistance in the rectifier bridge
This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
∧ 0.001
PNU=6EHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P141 Rectifier Induct 0.00 to 327.67 4 3/ BR
[mH] 0.00 3/ BR
Circuit inductance of the rectifier bridge
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01
PNU=6FHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P142 Inverter Resist. 0.000 to 32.767 4 3/ BR
[Ω] 0.000 3/ BR
Circuit resistance of the regenerative bridge
** This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS- parameter
∧ 0.001
P143 Inverter Induct. 0.00 to 327.67 4 3/ BR
[mH] 0.00 3/ BR
Circuit inductance of the regenerative bridge
** This parameter is automatically set when circuit identification takes place
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01
P144 DC Bus Capacit. 0.00 to 327.67 4 3/ BR
[mF] 0.00 3/ BR
Capacitance of the DC link
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
PNU=72Hex; ∧ 0.01


5.7 Control
r150 Control Status 0 to 1818Hex - 3/ BR
Status word of the control
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
Meaning of the individual segments
3 Rectifier current limit reached

4 Rectifier stability limit reached
11 Regerating current limit reached
12 Inverter stability limit reached
Segment bright: corresponding limit reached

Segment dark: corresponding limit not reached
∧1
PNU=96Hex; Type=V2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P160 Motor Curr Limit 0.0 to 150.0% of 4 3/ ABR
P075 150.0% 3/ A
Motoring current limit [%]
The rectifier current is limited to the value set here
RDS parameter
∧ 0.1
PNU=0A0Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P161 Regen Curr Limit -150.0 to 0.0% of 4 3/ ABR
P075 -150.0% 3/ A
** Generating current limit [%]
The regenerating current is limited to the value set here.
RDS parameter
∧ 0.1
PNU=0A1Hex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P310 DC Curr Reg Gain 0.01 to 1.00 4 3/ BR
0.15 3/ BR
Proportional gain of the DC link current controller
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01
P311 DC Curr Reg Time 0.001 to 1.000 4 3/ BR
[s] 0.015 3/ BR
Integral-action (reset) time of the DC link current controller
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
∧ 0.001
P313 DC Volts RegGain 0.10 to 200.00 4 3/ BR
3.00 3/ BR
Proportional gain of the DC link voltage controller
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01


P314 DC Volts RegTime 0.10 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[s] 3.00 3/ BR
Integral-action (reset) time of the DC link voltage controller
(P052=21)
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01
P316 DC V-Reg +Limit 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[%] of 1.35 0.01 3/ BR
Positive threshold for the dead band of the setpoint/actual-value difference *P071
of the Ud controller
A setpoint/actual-value deviation signal for the DC link voltage is not
applied to the Ud controller until the deviation of the DC link voltage
exceeds the value set here.
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01
PNU=13CHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P317 DC V-Reg -Limit -100.00 to 0.00 4 3/ BR
[%] of 1.35 -1.00% 3/ BR
Negative threshold for the dead band of the setpoint/actual-value difference *P071
of the Ud controller
A setpoint/actual-value deviation signal for the DC link voltage is not
applied to the Ud controller until the deviation of the DC link voltage drops
below the value set
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01
PNU=13DHex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P318 DC V(set,red) 0.00 to 160.00 4 3/ ABR
[%] of 1.35 80.00 3/ ABR
DC link voltage setpoint with active DC link reduction (i.e. upon request for *Supply
voltage at the
Ud reduction via control word 1, Bit 11= 1 (control word-source selection via
rectifier bridge
P571) or for internally generated Ud reduction command in event of
released current-dependent Ud reduction (P323= 1))
With parameter setting P318 > 100.00 %, the Ud controller of the E unit or
the E/R unit can be operated at full signal level with the recovery direction
blocked (P076= xx1).After precharging, this leads to the control angle α=0.
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01
P319 DC V(set,red)Hys 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ ABR
[%] of 1.35xP071 6.00% 3/ ABR
Hysteresis for Ud < Ud(set,red)
(message "Ud reduced")
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01
P320 Smooth Load Amps 0 to 9999 4 3/ BR
[ms] 5 3/ BR
Smoothing time for feedforward load current injection
RDS parameter
∧1
P321 DC CurrThresVred 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[%] 30.00 3/ BR
Current threshold for current-dependent DC link reduction
If Id (averaged over 3 current crests) falls below the value set here, the Ud
setpoint is reduced over a ramp (discharge time P330 active) to the value in
accordance with P318 when current-dependent Ud reduction (P323=1) is
released.
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01


P322 DC CurrHyst.Vred 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[%] 20.00 3/ BR
Hysteresis for current-dependent DC link voltage reduction
If Id (averaged over 3 current crests) exceeds the sum of P321 and the
value set here, the Ud setpoint increases over a ramp (precharge time
P329 active) to the value 1.35*Uline,feed when current-dependent Ud
reduction is released (P323=1).
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01
P323 Rel.RedCD V(Cur) 0 to 1 - 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Release of current-dependent DC reduction
*
0: current-dependent Ud reduction blocked
1: current-dependent Ud reduction released
(see also P318, P321, P322)
∧1
PNU=143Hex; Type=02; Scaling: 1Hex =
P329 PreCharge Time 0 to 9999 4 3/ BR
[ms] 500 3/ BR
DC link pre-charging time
RDS parameter
∧1
P330 Discharge Time 0 to 9999 4 3/ BR
[ms] 2000 3/ BR
DC link discharge time
An even parameter value causes abrupt lowering. With effect from software
version 4.5, an odd parameter value causes the Ud setpoint to ramp down
with Ud reduction controlled by STW1, bit11 (see Section 4.3.1.1 and
4.3.10.2).
With the command OFF1 and current-dependent Ud reduction, P330 is
active in all cases.
RDS parameter
∧1


5.8 Convenience functions

P353 Thyristor Test 0 to 3 - 3/ BR
0 3/ B
Function test of the S/F unit thyristors
*
0 Thyristor test inactive not active
1 Thyristors are tested when the first ON command is given after first ON
switching on the electronics power supply
2 Thyristors are tested at each ON command every ON
3 Thyristors tested at the next ON command. If no fault occurs, next ON
parameter P353 is reset to 0.
Important: When units are connected in parallel (see Section 3.7), the
thyristor test results are only conditionally useful.
Note: The thyristor test can only be carried out if the

DC link voltage is less than 5% of 1.35*P071. Following an ON
command, therefore, the unit waits in operating status o012
until this condition is fulfilled!
Exception: In slave mode (control word bit 27=1), the thyristor
test is only carried out when Ud 5%. When Ud 5%, a
selected thyristor test (P353>0) is ignored (with P353=3, P353
remains at 3).
The thyristors of the regenerating bridge are also fired for the
purposes of the thyristor test in the case of "regenerating
inhibited" (control word 1, bit 12, corresponding source P572
selected).
∧1
P354 Ground Fault Test 0 to 3 - 3/ BR
2 3/ B
Checking the S/F unit for ground faults
* This is not a protective function as defined by the VDE guidelines!
0 Ground fault test inactive inactive

1 Ground fault test when the first ON command is given after First ON
switching on the electronics power supply
2 Ground fault test at each ON command Any ON
3 Ground fault test at the next ON command. If no fault occurs, Next ON
parameter P353 is reset to 0
Note: The ground fault test is only carried out if the DC link voltage is
less than 50% of 1.35*P071; otherwise it is automatically
skipped!
∧1


P366 Auto Restart 0 to 2 - 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Auto restart after power outage
* If the power fails at one of the terminals U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3, 1U2/1T1,
1V2/1T2 1W2/1T3, X9.1 and X9.2, or if the voltage is not within the
permissible tolerance range and the DC link voltage has dropped beneath
the P074 *1.35 *P071 threshold, the S/F unit responds as follows::
0 Auto restart inhibited

No automatic restart; the corresponding fault message (F003, OFF
F004, F005, F007, F009 or F010) is triggered.
1 Acknowledgment following power outage

The rectifier/regenerating unit enters status o008 (switch-on
inhibit) or o009 (switch on/off from the I/O keys of the PMU). On ON Reset
power recovery, a new ON command must be given to enable
the DC link to re-charge. The inverter is not automatically
restarted by the WEA (auto restart) function.
2 Restart following power recovery and pre-charging of the DC

link
During the power outage, the controllers and firing pulses of the
PZD R/R are inhibited. The rectifier/regenerating unit enters ON Always
status o010. On recovery of the voltage, the DC link is charged
again as quickly as possible (see Section 4.3.10.1).
Important: The necessary external measures must be taken to guarantee

safety on an automatic restart!
∧1
P408 Caps FormingTime 1.0 to 600.0 4 2/ ABR
[min] 10.0 2/ AB
Forming time of the DC link
This parameter is used when forming the DC link (P052=20).
RDS parameter
∧ 0.1
P409 Contactor Delay 0.0 to +120.0 - 3/ BR
[s] 0.0 3/ B
Closing delay of the line contactor
Closing of the line contactor is delayed by the time set here with respect to
the "Switch on" command.
This parameter can be used to implement time grading when energizing the
line contactors of several drive units in order to prevent the inrush currents
of the autotransformers for regenerative mode overloading a supply
transformer.
∧ 0.1


5.9 Setpoint channel

P486 Src Current Setp 0 to 6005 2 3/ BR
(0) 3/ BR
Setpoint source
*
Parameter values:
As per PZD wiring of the setpoint channel (see Section 4.3.1.3)
Only effective if slave drive (control word 2, bit 27 =1)
G/R parameter
∧1
PNU=1E6Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P517 DC Volts Dev Lim 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[%] of 1.35 2.00 3/ B
Setpoint/actual-value deviation of Ud: *P071
If the deviation between the Ud setpoint and the actual Ud is considerable,
the "Setpoint/actual-value deviation" message is generated (status word 1
Bit 8 (r552))
Compare P518 (min. duration of deviation)
RDS- parameter
∧ 0.01
P518 Deviation Time 0.00 to 10.00 4 3/ BR
[s] 0.10 3/ B
Min. deviation time:
If there is a deviation (P517), the "Setpoint/actual-value deviation" message
(status word 1 bit 8 (r552)) is generated after this minimum time has
elapsed
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01


5.10 Control and status word

r550 Control Word 1 - 2/ BR
Display of the control word 1 bits 0 to 15, see Section 4.3.1.1.2
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
∧1
Display of the control word 2 bits 16 to 31, see Section 4.3.1.1.2
31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16
∧1
r552 Status Word 1 - 2/ BR
Display of the status word 1 bits 0 to 15, see Section 4.3.1.2.2
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
∧1
Display of the status word 2 bits 16 to 31, see Section 4.3.1.2.2
31 29 27 25
30 28 26 24
23 21 19 17
22 20 18 16
∧1
P554 Src ON/OFF1 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(i001=1010) 2/ BR
Source of the 'ON/OFF1' command (control word 1, bit 0)
* (i002=1001)
0: OFF1
1: Not allowed
1001: CUR, binary input 1
1010: PMU ON/OFF keys
Other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
wiring of the control word)
B/R Parameter
∧1
PNU=22AHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P555 Src1 OFF2 1 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(i001=1010) 2/ BR
Source 1 of the 'OFF2' command (control word 1, bit 1)
* (i002=1002)
0: Not allowed
1: Condition for operation
1002: binary input 2 of the CUR board
B/R Parameter
∧1
PNU=22BHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =


P556 Src2 OFF2 1 to 6005 2 2/ BR
1 2/ BR
*
Description see P555
B/R Parameter
∧1
PNU=22CHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P557 Src3 OFF2 1 to 6005 2 2/ BR
1 2/ BR
*
B/R Parameter
∧1
PNU=22DHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P561 Src InvRelease 1 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(1) 2/ BR
Source for the "Run enable" command (control word 1, bit 3)
*
0: Pulse inhibit
1: Automatic "Run enable" at end of waiting times
B/R Parameter
∧1
PNU=231Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P565 Src1 Fault Reset 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(i001=0) 2/ BR
Source 1 of the 'Reset' command (control word 1, bit 7)
* (i002=1003)
0: No source selected
1: Not allowed
1003: Binary input 3 of the CUR board
wiring of the control word) whereby "Reset" from the
PMU is always possible
Note: The "Acknowledge" control command is edge-triggered

B/R parameter
∧1
(0) 2/ BR
*
B/R parameter
∧1
(2001) 2/ BR
*
B/R parameter
∧1


P568 Src Jog1 ON 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
Source of the 'Jog 1' command (control word 1, bit 8)
*
0: No Jog operation
1: Not allowed
B/R-Parameter
∧1
P569 Src Jog2 ON 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
Source of the 'Jog 2' command (control word 1, bit 9)
*
B/R parameter
∧1
P571 Src Reduce DC V 0 to 6005 2 2/ ABR
0 2/ ABR
Source for the "Reduce Ud" control command (control word 1, bit 11)
*
Wait for Ud reduction
0: Ud reduction inactive
1: Ud reduction requested (permanent Ud reduction)
other values: see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
B/R parameter
∧1
P572 Src RegenRelease 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(1) 2/ BR
Source for the "Regenerating enable" control command (control word 1, bit
* 12)
** 0: Regenerating inhibited
1: Regenerating enabled
B/R parameter
∧1
P573 Src No ExtFault3 1 to 6005 2 2/ BR
1 2/ BR
Source for the "External fault 3" control command (control word 1, bit 13)
* L signal causes disconnection of the faulted drive.
0: Not allowed
1: No external fault 3
B/R parameter
∧1


P574 Src Motor/Regen 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
Source for the "Generating/motoring" control command (control word 1, bit
* 14)
** 0: Control command ineffective (motoring and generating mode
permitted
1: Not allowed
Other values:
see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data
During circuit identification parameter value 0 must be set.
If a rectifier unit is present, this parameter is visible with effect from

software version * 4.4.
B/R parameter
∧1
PNU=23EHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =
(1) 2/ BR
Source for the "External fault 1" control command (control word 1, bit 15)
* L signal causes disconnection of the faulted drive.
0: Not allowed
1: No external fault 1
Other values:
B/R parameter
∧1
PNU=23FHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P578 Src RDataSetBit0 0 to 6005 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Source for bit 0 (control word 2, bit 18) for selecting the reserve data set
* (RDS)
0: RDS bit 0 has the value 0

Other values:
B/R parameter
∧1
P579 Src RDataSetBit1 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
Source for bit 1 (control word 2, bit 19) for selecting the reserve data set
* (RDS)

Other values:
see allowed settings in section 4.3.1.1 (process data
B/R parameter
∧1


P583 Src 12-Pulse Mode 1 to 6005 2 3/ BR
(0) 3/ BR
Source for control command "12-pulse mode is selected" (control word 2,
* bit 23)
0: No 12-pulse mode
1: 12-pulse mode is selected
Other values: see allowed settings in section 4.3.1.1 (process data
B/R parameter
∧1
1 2/ BR
Source of the 'External fault 2' message (control word 2, bit 26)
* L signal causes disconnection of the faulted unit after a pre-charging time
of + 200ms if the rectifier/regenerating unit is in the "RUN" status.
0: Not allowed
1: No external fault
B/R parameter
∧1
P587 Src Master/Slave 0 to 6005 2 2/ BR
(0) 2/ BR
Source for the master/slave drive changeover (control word 2, bit 27)
*
0: Master drive: The control works with an internal current setpoint
1: Slave drive: The control works with an external current setpoint
B/R parameter
∧1
P588 Src No Ext Warn1 1 to 6005 2 3/ BR
(1) 3/ BR
Source of the 'External warning 1' message (control word 2, bit 28)
*
0: Not allowed
1: No external warning
Other values:
see allowed settings in Section 4.3.1.1 (process data wiring of
the control word)
B/R- parameter
∧1
P589 Src No Ext Warn2 1 to 6005 2 3/ BR
1 3/ BR
Source of the 'external warning 2' message (control word 2, bit 29))
*
0: Not allowed
1: No external warning
B/R parameter
∧1


P590 Src Base/Reserve 0 to 6005 - 3/ BR
1005 3/ BR
Source of the 'Base / reserve settings' switching command (control word 2,
* bit 30)
0: Base setting
1: Reserve setting
No base/reserve changeover possible
∧1
P591 Src ContactorMsg 1 to 4216 - 3/ BR
1 3/ BR
Source of the 'Main contactor energized' message(control word 2, bit 31)
*
0: Not allowed
1: No main contactor checkback signal
1001 to 1005: CUR terminals
4101 to 4116: SCB-SCI1- terminals (serial I/O)
4201 to 4216: SCB-SCI2- terminals (serial I/O)
For details see Section 4.3.1.1
Notes:
If the function is active, pulses are released as soon as the message is
available.
No base / reserve settings possible
∧1
r599 CW/SW 12-Pulse - 2/ BR
Display of control/status word for 12-pulse mode, bit 0 to 15, see Section
3.8.4.
15 13 11 9
14 12 10 8
7 5 3 1
6 4 2 0
∧1
P600 Trg Bit Ready On 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'ready for turn ON' (status word 1, bit 0)
* Power is ON, the drive may be turned on.
Depending on the selected index all settings according to Section 4.3.1.2

(process data wiring of the status word) may be selected.
i01: GG: selection of a base drive terminal

i02: SCI : selection of a SCI1/2 terminal
∧1
P601 Trg Bit Rdy Oper 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Ready for operation' (status word 1, bit 1)
*
All the settings specified in Section 4.3.1.2 (process data wiring of the
status word) are permissible, depending on the index selected
Parameter values, indices: as P600
∧1
P602 Trg Bit Operat 0 to 4212 2 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Run' (status word 1, bit 2)
* The unit is in operation.
∧1


P603 Trg Bit Fault 0 to 4212 2 2/ BR
i001=1002 2/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Fault' (status word 1, bit 3)
* i002=0
Note:
For issuing the fault message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-
level) is inverted (broken wire proof).
∧1
P604 Trg Bit No OFF2 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'No OFF2 command' (status word 1, bit 4)
*
∧1
P606 Trg BitONblocked 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Turn-ON locked' (status word 1, bit 6)
*
Note:
For issuing the message via a terminal the active status (bit has H-level) is
inverted (broken wire proof).
∧1
P607 Trg Bit Warning 0 to 4212 2 2/ BR
(0) 2/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Warning' (status word 1, bit 7)
*
Note:
∧1
P608 Trg Bit Deviat. 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination wiring of the status bit "Ud set = Ud act“ (status word 1, bit 8) -
* cf. P517
∧1
P610 Trg Regen Ready 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination wiring of the status bit "Regenerating ready" (status word 1,
* Bit 10)
∧1
P611 Trg Low Voltage 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Undervoltage' (status word 1, bit 11)
*
Note:
∧1


P612 Trg Bit Contact 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Energize main contactor' (status word 1, bit 12)
* H level: energize contactor!
Important: Relay X9-4/5, whose function cannot be programmed, is

provided for controlling the main contactor.
∧1
P613 Trg DC V reduced 0 to 4212 2 3/ ABR
0 3/ ABR
* Destination wiring for the status bit "Ud reduced“
(status word 1, bit 13)
∧1
P614 Trg Motor/Regen 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination wiring for the status bit "Regenerative/motoring mode" (status
* word 1, bit 14)
**
Parameter values, Indices: as P600
∧1
P618 Trg Current Lim. 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination wiring of the status bit "Current limit active"
* (status word 2, bit 18)
Note:
inverted (broken-wire proof).
∧1
P619 Trg Bit Ext Flt1 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'External fault 1' (status word 2, bit 19)
*
Note:
∧1
P620 Trg Bit Ext Flt2 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'External fault 2'
Note:
If an ON command is active, L-level causes fault trip after 200 msec.
∧1


P621 Trg Bit ExtWarn 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'External warning'
Note:
∧1
P622 Trg Bit i2t Inv 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Warning unit overload'
* (status word 2, bit 22);
Note:
∧1
P623 Trg BitFltTmpInv 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Fault unit overtemperature'
* (status word 2, bit 23
Note:
Parameter values, Indices: as for P600
∧1
P624 Trg BitWarTmpInv 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Warning unit overtemperature'
* (status word 2, bit 24
Note:
∧1
P631 Trg Bit Charging 0 to 4212 2 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Destination of the status bit 'Charging active' (status word 2, bit 31)
*
Note:
∧1


5.11 Analog input/output

P655 CUR AnaOutActVal 0 to 999 - 2/ BR
37 2/ BR
Number of the parameters whose value is to be output at the analog output
of the CUR, (terminal X102-14).
∧1
P656 CUR AnaOut Gain ±320,00 - 2/ BR
[V] 10.00 2/ BR
Gain for the analog output of the CUR (terminal X102-14)
P656 = desired analog output voltage at PWE=100%, if offset=0
The output voltage is calculated with the following formula:

U(out)= [(PWE/100%)*P656] + P657
∧ 0.01 V
PNU=290Hex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P657 CUR AnaOutOffset -100.00 to 100.00 - 2/ BR
[V] 0.00 2/ BR
Offset for the analog output on the CUR (terminal X102-14)
The analog output can represent voltages of -10V to +10V.
∧ 0.01 V
P658 AnaOut Conf Curr 0 to 3 - 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
* Configuration of terminal X102-16 (actual current display)
0 Output with correct sign signed
(positive voltage: motoring current)
(negative voltage: regenerative current)
1 Output absolute value (positive voltage only) absoluteVal
inverted
2 Signed output, inverted
(positive voltage: regenerative current)
(negative voltage: motoring current) inv. absVal
3 Output of absolute value, inverted (negative voltage only)
∧1
P660 SCI AnalogInConf 0 to 2 6 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Configuration of the SCI analog inputs; defines the kind of the input signals
Parameter values Terminals Terminals

X428/3, 6, 9 X428/5, 8, 11
0: -10 V ... + 10 V - 20 mA ... + 20 mA
1: 0 V ... + 10 V 0 mA ... + 20 mA
2: 4 mA ... + 20 mA
Notes:
Only one signal can be wired per input; alternatively voltage or current
signals can be evaluated.
Voltage and current signals must be connected to different terminals.
Settings 1 and 2 only allow unipolar signals, i. e. the internal process data
are also unipolar.
At setting 2 an input current < 2 mA causes a fault trip (broken wire proof)
The offset scaling of the analog inputs is done via P662.
i001: Sl11 Slave 1, analog input 1

Condition:
The related SCB board must be reported via P090 and P091, respectively
∧1


P661 SCI AnaInSmooth 0 to 15 6 3/ BR
2 3/ BR
Filter time constant of the SCI analog inputs

∧1
P662 SCI AnalogInOffs -320.00 to 320.00 6 3/ BR
[V] 0.00 3/ BR
Offset scaling of the SCI analog inputs
Description for setting see SCI manual

∧ 0.01 V
P664 SCI AnaOutActVal 0 to 999 6 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Actual value output via SCI analog outputs
Description for setting:

Enter the parameter number of the quantities, which are to be issued; for
details see SCI manual.
i001: Sl11 Slave 1, analog output 1

Condition:
The related SCB board must be reported via P090 and P091, respectively
∧1
P665 SCI AnaOut Gain -320.00 to 320.00 6 3/ BR
[V] 10.00 3/ BR
Proportional gain of the SCI analog outputs
Description for setting: see SCI manual

∧ 0.01 V
P666 SCI AnaOut Offs -320.00 to 320.00 6 3/ BR
[V] 0.00 3/ BR
Offset of the SCI analog outputs

∧ 0.01 V
PNU=29AHex; Type=I2; Scaling: 1Hex =


5.12 Communications
P680 Scom1 Act Value 0 to 999 16 3/ BR
i001=968 3/ B
Process data assignment for actual-value output over serial interface SST1.
* Defines the parameter positions in the telegram.
i002=0
...
i016=0
Notes:
Word 1 should be assigned status word 1 (r552=r968).
The length (number of words) of the process data part in the telegram is set
with P686, Index i001.
i001=Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram

...
∧1
P681 Scom2 Act Value 0 to 999 5 3/ BR
i001=599 3/ B
Selection of the process data to be transmitted over serial interface SST2
* (actual values) with peer-to-peer protocol selected (P688=1).
i002=34
i003=0
Defines the parameter positions in the telegram. i004=0
i005=0
Notes:
The length (number of words) of the process data part in the peer-to-peer
telegram is set with P686, Index i003.

...
∧1
P682 SCB Protocol 0 to 5 - 3/ HBR
0 3/ H
SCB can be operated as
* master for the SCI boards or as
serial communications board
(see SCB manual).
0 = SCI-Module: Master for SCI boards SCI-Module

1 = 4 wire USS 4 wire USS
2 = 2 wire USS 2 wire USS
3 = Peer to Peer Peer 2 Peer
4 = Option-1: not used Option 1
5 = Option-2; not used Option 2
Condition:
SCB board must be reported via P090 and 0P91, respectively
∧1
PNU=2AAHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P683 SCom/SCB BusAddr 0 to 30 2 3/ BR
0 3/ B
Bus address of the serial communication interfaces
*
i001 = SST1: bus address of serial comm. interface 1 (CUR)
i002 = SCB: SCB baud rate, if P682=1, 2
∧1
PNU=2ABHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =


P684 SCom/SCB Baud 1 to 813 2 3/ BR
i001=6 3/ B
Serial interfaces baud rate
* i002=6
i003=13
1 300 Baud 300 Bd
2 600 Baud 600 Bd
3 1200 Baud 1200 Bd
4 2400 Baud 2400 Bd
5 4800 Baud 4800 Bd
6 9600 Baud 9600 Bd
7 19200 Baud 19200 Bd
8 38400 Baud 38400 Bd
9 57650 Baud 57650 Bd
10 76800 Baud 76800 Bd
11 93750 Baud 93750 Bd
12 115200 Baud 115200 Bd
13 187500 Baud 187500 Bd
i001 = SST1: serial comm. interface 1 (CUR)

i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2, 3
i003 = SST2: serial comm. interface 2 (CUR with PTP1 option)
∧1
PNU=2ACHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P685 SCom/SCB #PKWDat 0 to 127 2 3/ BR
i001=127 3/ B
Number of words (16 bit) of the parameter data part in the net data block of
* the telegram.
i002=127
0: No parameter data part in the telegram

3, 4 Parameter data part is 3 (parameter identifier, Ind, parameter
value), 4 words long
127 Variable parameter data length for the transfer of parameter
description and texts

i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2
∧1
PNU=2ADHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat 0 to 16 3 3/ BR
2 3/ B
Number of words (16 bits) of the process data part in the net data block of
* the telegram.

i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2, 3
PWE=0 means that no process data are expected in the USS protocol and
that none are sent.
i003 = SST2: serial comm. interface 2 (CUR with PTP1 option), if

Peer-to-Peer protocol is selected (P688=1), from 1 to 5 net
data words can be sent.
∧1
PNU=2AEHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =


P687 SCom/SCB TlgOFF 0 to 6500 3 2/ BR
[ms] i001=0 2/ BR
Telegram OFF time of CUR and SCB
* If no correct telegram is received within the parameterized time a fault trip
i002=0
i003=1
is set.

Value 0: No monitoring, no fault trip; must be parameterized for sporadic
(acyclic) telegrams, e. g. operator panel OP at serial comm. interface 1.

i002 = SCB: SCB, if P682=1, 2, 3
i003 = SST2: serial comm. interface 2 (CUR with PTP1 option), if

Peer-to-Peer protocol is selected (P688=1).
With active Peer-To-Peer protocol (P688 = 1) and telegram
failure time P687.i003 ≠ 0, the unit remains in operating state
o008 until telegram traffic is correct (see P688).
With P687.i003 = 0 AND P681.i001 = 599 in the case of
telegram failure, bits 3 and 6 of the first SST2 Peer-to-Peer
receive data (the control/status word sent from the partner unit
in 12-pulse mode) are set to 0.
∧ 1ms
PNU=2AFHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P688 SST2 Protocol 0 to 1 - 3/ BR
0 3/ B
Selection of the protocol for SST2 (serial interface 2 (CUR with PTP1
* option))
0 Interface is provided for factory-internal diagnostics purposes (7

data bits + 1 parity bit, even parity,1 stop bit)
1 Peer-to-Peer protocol factory-internal
(8 data bits + 1 parity bit, even parity,1 stop bit) Peer to Peer
With active Peer-To-Peer protocol (P688 = 1) and telegram
failure time P687.i003 ≠ 0, the unit remains in operating state
o008 until telegram traffic is correct.
∧1
PNU=2B0Hex; Typ=O2; Normierung: 1Hex =
P689 SCB Peer2PeerExt 0 to 1 5 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Immediate transfer on of data received via the peer to peer protocol of
SCB.
Mark of these words of the received peer to peer telegram which are to be
transferred on immediately.
CUR only
0: No immediate transfer (only to CUR) Transfer
1: Immediate transfer (and passing to CUR)
i001 = W01: Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram

.....
Condition: P682 = 3 (peer to peer protocol)
∧1
PNU=2B1Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P690 SCB Act Values 0 to 999 16 3/ BR
i001=968 3/ B
Actual value output via the serial communications interface of the SCB
* board.
i002=0
...
Defines, which parameter is to be transferred at which telegram address. i016=0
Notes:
Word 1 should be set for status word 1 (r552=r968)
The length (number of words) of the process data part of the telegram is set
with P686, Index 02
i001 Word 01 of the (process data part of the) telegram

...
i016 Word16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
∧1


P694 CB/TB Act Values 0 to 999 16 3/ BR
i001=968 3/ B
Actual-value output over the serial interface of the CB and/or TB module
* Defines which parameter is to be transferred at which telegram address.
i002=0
...
i016=0
Note:
Word 1 should be set for status word 1 (r552=r968)
If the value "0" is entered (factory settings from i002 to i016), the constant
value "0" is passed on.

...
i016 Word16 of the (process data part of the) telegram
∧1
P695 CB/TB TlgOFFTime 0 to 6500 - 3/ BR
[ms] 20 3/ BR
Telegram lag time of CB and TB
* If no correct telegram is received within the parameterized time a fault trip
is set.
Monitoring is carried out at intervals of 20 ms, therefore it is only
appropriate to set values that are multiples of 20 ms.

0: no monitoring, no fault trip; must be parameterized for sporadic
(non-cyclic) telegrams, e. g. operator panel OP at serial comm.
interface 1.
∧ 1 ms
P696 CB Parameter 1 0 to 65535 - 3/ HBR
0 3/ H
Communication board parameter 1.
See manual of the used communication board.
Parameter is only needed if a communication board is reported (P090 or

P091 = 1)
The communication board checks, if the set value is valid. If the value is not
accepted, the fault message 80 is issued with fault value 5
∧1
0 3/H
Communication board parameter 2
see P696
∧1
0 3/ H
See P696
∧1
PNU=2BAHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
0 3/ H
See P696
∧1
PNU=2BBHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
0 3/ H
See P696
∧1
PNU=2BCHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
0 3/ H
See P696
∧1
PNU=2BDHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =


0 3/ H
See P696
∧1
PNU=2BEHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
0 3/ H
See P696
∧1
PNU=2BFHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
0 3/ H
Communication Board Parameter 9
See P696
∧1
PNU=2C0Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
0 3/ H
See P696
∧1
PNU=2C1Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P706 CB Parameter 11 0 5 3/ HBR
0 3/ H
See P696
PNU=2C2Hex; Type=L2; ∧1
Scaling: 1Hex =


5.13 Diagnostics
r720 SW Version 3 3/U BR
Software version of the PCBs in positions 1, 2 and 3 of the electronic box.
Indices:
i001: Pos1: Software version of the PCB in position 1
i002: Pos2: Software version of the PCB in position 2 Pos1
i003: Pos3: Software version of the PCB in position 3 Pos2
Pos3
∧ 0.1
PNU=2D0Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
r721 SW Generat. Date 3 3/U BR
Software generation date of the CUR board.
Indices: i001= Year Year

i002= Month Mon
i003= Day Day
∧1
r722 SW ID 3 3/U BR
Extended software version ID of the modules in slots 1, 2 and 3 of the
electronic box for internal purposes.
Indices:
i001: SPL1: Software code of the PCB in position 1
∧ 0.1
r723 PCB Code 3 3/U BR
Identification code of the PCBs in positions 1, 2 and 3 of the electronic box
Indices:
i001: SPL1: PCB code of the PCB in position 1
PCB codes:
CUR: 105
CB: 140 - 149
TB: 130 - 139
SCB: 120 - 129
∧1
r725 HeadroomCalcTime 0 to 100% - 3/ BR
[%] -
Headroom of the CPU on the CUR module.
PNU=2D5Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =∧1% PZD gr.: 1

Analog output: 100% ∧ 100% computer time free
=


r730 SCB Diagnostics 16 3/ HBR
SCB diagnostics
All values in HEX display
If a quantity is represented, overflow takes place at FF Hex.
The meaning of several Indices depends of the selected SCB protocol
(P682).
i001: flTC Number of error-free telegrams

i002: Terr Number of error telegrams
i003: Ferr Number of byte frame-errors
i004: Orun Number of overrun errors
i005: Prty Parity error
i006: STX STX error
i007: ETX ETX error
i008: BCC Block check error
i009: L/KL USS/Peer to Peer: incorrect telegram length
SCI modules: required maximum number of terminals
according to process data wiring (P554 to P631).
i010: T/An USS: Timeout
SCI Modules: required analog inputs / outputs
according to process data wiring of the setpoint
channel and actual value output via SCI (P664) .
i011: BCd0 PCB code word 0
i012: BCd1 PCB code word 1
i013: Warn SCB-DPR- warning word
i014: Sl1? Information, if slave 1 needed and if yes, which type.
0: no slave needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i015: Sl2? Information, if slave 2 needed and if yes, which type.
0: no slave needed
1: SCI1
2: SCI2
i016: IniF: with 'SCI modules': initialization fault
∧1
PNU=2DAHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =
r731 CB/TB Diagnostics 32 3/ HBR
For detailed information see manuals of the used communication boards
(CB) or technology boards (TB).
∧1
PNU=2DBHex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =
r748 Fault Time 24 2/ BR
The instants at which faults occur (reading of the hours counter r013 at the
instant the fault occurs)
See parameter r947 for details
Trip description by: r947 Fault number

r949 Fault value
r951 List of fault texts
P952 Number of faults
∧1
PNU=2ECHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =


5.14 Modulator
P773 Deadband Convert 0.01 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[%] 0.01 3/ BR
The reversing threshold of the auto-reversing module (in rectifier direction)
If the (signed) setpoint of the DC link current (output of the DC link voltage
controller on the output side of the limiting module) exceeds the value of +
0.05% set with this parameter, the firing pulses of the rectifier bridge are
enabled. These pulses are inhibited if the setpoint of the DC link current
drops below the value set here.
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01 %
P774 Deadband Invert -100.00 to -0.01 4 3/ BR
[%] -3.00 3/ BR
** The reversing threshold of the auto-reversing module (in regenerating
direction)
If the (signed) setpoint of the DC link current (output of the DC link voltage
controller on the output side of the limiting module) exceeds the value of -
0.05% set with this parameter, the firing pulses of the rectifier bridge are
enabled. These pulses are inhibited if the setpoint of the DC link current
drops below the value set here..
RDS parameter
∧ 0.01
P775 Min Gating Angle 0 to 120 4 3/ BR
[°el] 0 3/ BR
Alpha G limit (rectifier stability limit)
RDS parameter
∧ 1 °el
P776 Max Gating Angle 120 to 165 4 3/ BR
[°el] 150 3/ B
Alpha W limit (inverter stability limit)
RDS parameter
∧ 1 °el
P777 Max Gating Angle Ramp 0.00 to 100.00 4 3/ BR
[%] of P075 20.00 3/ BR
Transition ramp of the alpha W limit from pulsating to continuous DC (for
currents < pulsating threshold, the control angle is limited to 165°, for
currents > (pulsating threshold+P777) to P776 with linear interpolation
inbetween)
RDS parameter
∧1%


5.15 Factory parameters

P785 I2t Control Word 0 to 1 - 3/ HBR
2 1 3/ B
* Control word for the i t power section
2
0 Response of the i t monitor for the power section (i.e. 100% of
2
the i t value has been reached) results in an automatic
reduction of the limit for the current setpoint to the rated DC
current (in infeed direction or at 92% of the rated direct current
in regenerative feedback direction) until the absolute value of
the current setpoint has dropped below the rated DC current
before its limit (or 92% of that in regenerative feedback
direction) and the calculated equivalent junction temperature
rise is again below the unit-specific response threshold. The
current setpoint limit is then raised again.
2
1 Response of the i t monitor for the power section (i.e. 100% of
2
the i t value has been reached) results in fault F022 and
disconnection.
∧1
P793 Line Voltage Delay 0.01 to 1.00 - 3/ BR
[s] 0.03 3/ BR
Stabilizing time for the line voltage
If the "Switch-on" command is given, the unit waits in status o010 for
voltage to be applied to the power section. The line voltage is not assumed
to be applied to the power terminals until amplitude, frequency and phase
symmetry lie within the permissible tolerance range for longer than the time
set with this parameter. The parameter applies to both the rectifier and
regenerative power terminals.
∧ 0.01 s
P799 Special Access 0 to 65535 - 3/U BR
0 3/ BR
Parameter for special access
∧1


5.16 Profile parameters

P917 Change Reports 0 to 7 - 3/ BR
0 3/ B
Control word for spontaneous messages
* If the value of an active parameter is changed, the new value is reported to
the programmable controller connected by means of the spontaneous
reporting mechanism. This function can be activated and de-activated for
each interface.
Important:
When the control word is modified, spontaneous message buffers can be
deleted with the loss of spontaneous messages!
0 No spontaneous messages inactive

1 Output of spontaneous messages over the DPR interface TB/CB
(TB/CB) SCom
2 Output of spontaneous messages over the BASE SERIAL SCB (USS)
interface (SST1)
4 Output of spontaneous messages over SCB with USS protocol
Setting help:
Each interface is coded with a number.
Enter the number and/or the sum of several numbers assigned to the
interfaces to enable the spontaneous message mechanism for the relevant
interface(s).
∧1
P918 CB Bus Address 0 to 200 - 3/ HBR
3 3/ H
Protocol depending bus address for communication board; see manual of
this board.
Notes:
The communication board checks, if the set value is valid. (Bus addresses
0 to 2 are reserved for master stations). If the value is not accepted, the
fault message 80 is issued with fault value 5
Condition:
P090=1 or P091=1 (communication board installed)
∧1
P927 Parameter Access 0 to 31 - 3/ BR
6 3/ BR
Release of interfaces for the parameterization.
* This parameter performs the same function as P053.
Parameter P053 can always be modified.
For description, see P053.
∧1
P928 Src Base/Reserve 0 to 6005 - 3/ BR
1005 3/ BR
Source of the switching command 'base / reserve settings' (control word 2,
* bit 30)
This parameter performs the same function as P590.
For description, see P590.
∧1
PNU=3A0Hex; Type=L2; Scaling: 1Hex =


r947 Fault Memory 64 2/ BR
Display of the faults which have occurred at the last trips. Each fault
number has a fault value and a fault time assigned to it (see Chapter 7 for
details of fault numbers and fault values). The relationship between the
responsible parameters is shown in the diagram below.
The fault numbers for the last (8 max.) faults are stored under the indices of
parameter r947. The fault number for the current (not yet reset) trip is
indicated by r947.001, the fault number for the last reset fault is indicated
by index 9, the fault number of the last-but-one reset fault is indicated by
index 17, etc. The entry "0" here means that no previous fault has occurred.
In contrast to the converter (SIMOVERT Master Drive FC, VC, SC), in the
case of the rectifier/regenerating unit only one fault can occur for each trip,
therefore the only significant indices are 1, 9, 17, 25, 33, 41, 49 and 57.
A fault value in the appropriate index of parameter r949 is assigned to every
fault number. This provides more detailed information on the type of fault.
Apart from this, for each trip, the fault time which is the actual value of the
operating hours counter (r013) is stored in parameter r748. The data for the
current (not yet reset) trip is present as "day", "hours" and "seconds" in
indices 1 to 3. The data for the already reset, previous trips is present in
groups of 3 elements on the following indices.
r947 r949 r049
Fault number Fault value Fault time [h]
Index 1 Current Current Current Index 1

0 0 1 acknowl.
st Index 2
0 0 2nd acknowl. Index 3
0 0 3rd acknowl. Index 4
0 0 4th acknowl. Index 5

Index 9 1st acknowl. 1st acknowl.
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
Index 17 2 acknowl.
nd 2 acknowl.
nd
... ...
Plain text describing the fault numbers is available under the corresponding
index of parameter r951.
If the electronics supply voltage fails, all fault numbers are saved, but only
those fault values and fault times relating to the last trip are stored. After
the supply voltage has been restored, the other indices have the value "0".
∧1
r949 Fault Value 64 2/ BR
Interference value of the faults, permits a more precise diagnosis for many
fault numbers.
The fault values are saved in the same indices as the related fault numbers
(r947) - see parameter P947.
∧1
r951 Fault Texts List 103 2/ BR
List of fault texts; every fault text is saved in the index equivalent to its fault
number.
∧1


P952 # of Faults 0 to 8 - 2/ BR
0 2/ BR
Number of faults stored in the fault memory (max. 8).
If the parameter is set to '0', the diagnosis memory (r748 - trip times, r947 -
fault number, r949 fault value) is cleared.
∧1
r953 Warning Param 1 - 3/ BR
Warning Parameter 1
If a warning (numbers 1 to 16) is active, the related bar in the display is ON
16 14 12 10
15 13 11 9
8 6 4 2
7 5 3 1
For the meaning of the individual warnings, see Chapter 7.
∧1
PNU=3B9Hex; Type=V2; Scaling: 1Hex =
Warning Parameter 2
If a warning (numbers 17 to 32) is active, the related bar in the display is
ON
32 30 28 26
31 29 27 25
24 22 20 18
23 21 19 17
∧1
PNU=3BAHex; Type=V2; Scaling: 1Hex =
Warning Parameter 3
If a warning (numbers 33 to 48) is active, the related segment in the display
is ON
48 46 44 42
47 45 43 41
40 38 36 34
39 37 35 33
∧1
PNU=3BBHex; Type=V2; Scaling: 1Hex =
Warning Parameter 4
is ON
64 62 60 58
63 61 59 57
56 54 52 50
55 53 51 49
∧1
PNU=3BCHex; Type=V2; Scaling: 1Hex =
Warning Parameter 5
is ON
80 78 76 74
79 77 75 73
72 70 68 66
71 69 67 65
∧1
PNU=3BDHex; Type=V2; Scaling: 1Hex =


Warning Parameter 6 (CB-warnings)
is ON
96 94 92 90
95 93 91 89
88 86 84 82
87 85 83 81
∧1
PNU=3BEHex; Type=V2; Scaling: 1Hex =
Warning Parameter 6 (TB-warnings 1)
If a warning (numbers 97 to 112) is active, the related segment in the
display is ON
112 110 108 106

111 109 107 105
104 102 100 98
103 101 99 97
∧1
PNU=3BFHex; Type=V2; Scaling: 1Hex =
Warning Parameter 6 (TB-warnings 2)
If a warning (numbers 113 to 128) is active, the related segment in the
display is ON
128 126 124 122

127 125 123 121
120 118 116 114
119 117 115 113
∧1
PNU=3C0Hex; Type=V2; Scaling: 1Hex =
Display parameter of control word 1 (bit 0-15)
Identical with r550 (control word 1)
∧1
Display parameter of status word 1 (bit 0-15)
Identical with r552 (status word 1)
∧1
P970 Factory Settings 0 to 1 - 3/ B
1 3/ B
Parameter reset to factory settings
*
0: Parameter reset: all parameters are reset to their original values Param.Reset
(factory settings). After this the parameter is reset to '1'.
1: no parameter reset
Return
Note: This function can also be selected via P052=1.
∧1
PNU=3CAHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
P971 EEPROM Storing 0 to 1 - 3/ BR
0 3/ BR
Passing of the parameter values of the RAM to the EEPROM on a change
* from 0 auf 1.
It takes about 15s to process all of the values. During this time, the PMU
stays in the Values mode.
∧1
PNU=3CBHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =


r980 PNU-Lst. 1 avail 101 3/ BR
List of the available parameter numbers; part 1.
The parameter numbers are listed in a positive sequence.
The first existing '0' shows, that no more parameter numbers are available.
Index range: 1 to 101.

As special function the value of i101 is the number of the parameter which
contains the next following part of the list. If i101 has a value of '0' then
there are no more parts of the list.
∧1
List of the available parameter numbers; part 2
See r980.
∧1
List of the available parameter numbers; part 3
See r980.
∧1
r990 PNU-Lst.1 chnged 101 3/ BR
List of the changed parameter numbers; part 1.
The parameter numbers are listed in a positive sequence.
The first existing '0' shows, that no more parameter numbers are changed.
Index range: 1 to 101.

As special function the value of i101 is the number of the parameter which
contains the next following part of the list. If i101 has a value of '0' then
there are no more parts of the list.
∧1
PNU=3DEHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
List of the changed parameter numbers; part 2
See r990.
∧1
PNU=3DFHex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =
List of the changed parameter numbers; part 3
See r990
∧1
PNU=3E0Hex; Type=O2; Scaling: 1Hex =

06.01 Operator Control
6 Operator Control
The common rectifier can be controlled via:
♦ the PMU (Parameterization Unit) on the CUR module
♦ the control terminal strip on the CUR (Section 3.3 “Control terminal strip“)
♦ the OP1S operator control panel (Section 9.4 “Options/Operator control“)
♦ the SST1 serial interface (RS485 and RS232) on PMU-X300
♦ the optional SST2 serial interface (RS485) for peer-to-peer coupling
Operator control using the PMU (see diagram below) is described in this section.
Seven-segment displays
Reversing key
On key
Raise key
Changeover key, operator control level

Off key Lower key
P
X300
Figure 6.1 Parameterization unit
6.1 Operator control elements
Operator control elements Function

Rectifier/regenerating unit switch on (standard).
For faults: Return to the fault display.
Rectifier/regenerating unit shutdown depending on the parameterization of
OFF1 or OFF2 (P554 to P557).
No function
1) Changeover between parameter number, index and parameter value

P levels (see Figure 6.2), whereby the command only becomes effective when
the key is released.
2) Resetting the current fault message (see Figure 6.3)
3) In conjunction with the arrow keys <raise> and <lower>, additional
functions are possible (refer to Figs. 6.2 and 6.3), whereby is pressed
first followed by the other key. This command becomes effective once the
other key has been pressed.
Changing the parameter number when the parameter number level is
displayed, changing the index when the index level is displayed, or the
,
parameter value when the parameter value level is displayed.
Table 6.1 Function of the operator control elements on the PMU

Operator Control 06.01
6.2 Displays
Tables 6.2 and 6.3 below give an overview of the displays that can be shown on the PMU:
Parameter number Index Parameter value

e.g. e.g. e.g.
Basic converter
Visualization
parameters Technology board
Basic converter
Setting
parameters Technology board
Table 6.2 Displaying visualization and setting parameters on the PMU
Actual value Parameter value Alarm Fault

not (yet)
possible
Display
Table 6.3 Status display on the PMU
NOTE
The parameters are described in Chapter 5 and the fault and alarm messages are described in Chapter 7.
Once the electronics supply voltage has been switched on, either the PMU operating display shows the current
operating state of the rectifier/regenerating unit (e.g. o009) or a fault or alarm message is displayed (e.g. F060).
The operating states are described in Section 5.1 and the fault and alarm messages are described in Sections
7.1 and 7.2.
As described in Section 6.3 (Figures 6.2 and 6.3), it is possible to change over from one display level to another.
By pressing , it is possible to change from the status display (e.g. o009) to the parameter number level in
which the separate parameters can be selected via <raise> or <lower>. The selected access level (P051) and
the operating state (r000, r001) determine here which parameters are displayed. All parameters are not always
visible (see Chapter 5/overview of the abbreviations/footnotes 5 to 8)!
Pressing again switches to the index level for indexed parameters (see Section 4.1.2) but directly to the
parameter value level for all other parameters and the index or the value can be modified via <raise> and
<lower>. The same conditions apply for changing a parameter value as were described for the parameter
number, i.e. a parameter value can only be modified under an appropriate access level and an appropriate
operating state.
If the 4 characters of the seven-segment display are insufficient for displaying a parameter value, only 4 figures
will be displayed initially (see Figure 6.4). The presence of further figures to the right or left of this "window" is
indicated by flashing of the left-hand or right-hand figure. If +<lower> or +<raise> are pressed
simultaneously, this "window" can be moved to view the parameter value.
By pressing again, it is possible to switch back to the parameter number level..

06.01 Operator Control
6.3 Structure
Ready to switch-on
Operating display
P
Parameter number level
P P
Fast changeover + P P P + Fast changeover
+ + +
P P P
Parameter no
indexed?
yes
Index level
highest
index
P P P
Parameter value level
highest
value
P P P
Return to parameter number
Figure 6.2 Operator control structure using the PMU

Operator Control 06.01
After
delay time
Fault Alarm
Display before
fault/alarm
P P P P Alarm
cause
P Alarm
cause
P
+ + removed or removed or
Fault Fault
acknow- acknow-
ledged ledged
or or
Fault not Fault not
with a fault
acknow- acknow- condition
ledged ledged
Figure 6.3 Operator control structure of the PMU for alarms and faults
Handling of fault and alarm messages (reset, move into the "background" in order to parameterize) is described
in Chapter 7 in detail.
P
+
P
+
Figure 6.4 Shifting the PMU display for parameters

values with more than 4 digits

06.01 Fault and Alarm Messages
7 Fault and Alarm Messages

When a fault or alarm is generated, it is displayed immediately on the PMU as well as on the optional OP1S (see
Section 6.3, Figure 6.3). An alarm disappears automatically from the display when the problem has been
corrected. A fault message must be reset by pressing the P key on the PMU or the reset key on the OP1S after
the problem has been corrected, before it is possible to return to a normal operating state.
NOTE
A current fault message or alarm can be "moved into the background" by pressing the P + keys on the PMU
simultaneously, in order to parameterize or to read the fault value via r949.001. Acknowledgment of a fault
message "placed in the background" is not possible via OP1S either. You must have the fault message
displayed on the display of the PMU again by pressing P + before you can acknowledge it. Via the optional
operator panel OP1S, in spite of an active fault message or alarm it is still possible to parameterize. If no key is
pressed on the PMU for 30 s, the fault message which was moved into the background or active alarm
appears automatically on the PMU. The message can be brought back into the foreground by simultaneously
pressing the P + keys on the PMU at the parameter number level.
7.1 Fault messages
General information on faults

The following information is available for each fault:
Parameter r947 Fault number

r949 Fault value
r951 Fault text list
P952 Number of faults
r748 Time of fault
For detailed information on the organization of the fault memory, see r947 in Section 5.16.
If a fault message is not acknowledged before the electronics power supply is switched off, this fault message
will appear again the next time the power supply is switched on. The unit will not start up unless this message is
acknowledged (except if auto restart has been selected; see under P366 and Section 4.3.10.1).
NOTE
The software used for the power supply unit is identical to that used for the power supply and regenerative
power supply units of the equipment series 6SE70.
be ignored.

Fault and Alarm Messages 06.01
Fault Fault description Fault Meaning Possible causes

No. value Countermeasures
F001 Feedb Cont. - - - Check P591 Q.HS checkback
signal.
No checkback signal from main contactor The parameter value must match
the main contactor checkback
If a main contactor checkback signal is signal connection
configured and is not received within 500 - Check the main contactor
ms after the power-up command. checkback signal circuit.
F003 Line Over V - - - Line overvoltage
- P071 set to wrong value
Network overvoltage of the infeed supply
Voltage at the terminals X1-U1/L1, and

X1-W1/L3 are greater than the response
threshold (120% of P071).
F004 Line Under V - - - Line undervoltage
- Monitoring too finely or wrongly
Line undervoltage set (P074, P071)
Voltage at terminals X1-U1/L1, or X1-
W1/L3 and/or X4-1U2/1T1, X4-1V2/1T2 or
X4-1W2/1T3 lower than the response
threshold (P074 and P071).
F005 Line Frequ. 1 Frequency of the regenerative -Line frequency < 45Hz or > 65Hz
bridge
Line frequency outside permissible range 2 < 45Hz
Frequency of the rectifier bridge
This fault message is generated if the line 3 < 45Hz
frequency is lower than 45 Hz or higher Frequency of the regenerative
than 65Hz (or greater than 68.665Hz on 4 bridge
Software Version 4.4 and higher). > 65Hz
Frequency of the rectifier bridge
> 65Hz
F006 Bus Over V - - -
DC link voltage
The unit was shutdown due to an

excessive DC link voltage.
Line voltage-  Shutdown threshold

range 
380 V to 460 V  835 V
500 V to 575 V  1042 V
660 V to 690 V  1244 V
F007 AuxPowerOFF 1, 2, 3 Electronics supply voltage of the - Check electronics power supply
rectifier/regenerating unit too low - Power supply fuse for parallel
Failure or overvoltage of the electronics units blown
supply voltage in "Run" status - Internal fault on the power
or Power interface module of the interface module of a slave unit
at least one power section connected in 5 rectifier/regenerating unit or
parallel reports "Power supply faulted" parallel power section reports
"Power supply faulted"
F009 Rec PhaseFlt 1 Voltage failure in the rectifier - Parameter P074 wrongly set
bridge (X1-U1/L1, X1-V1/L2 or X1- - Phase failure in the rectifier
Phase failure in the rectifier bridge W1/L3) bridge
2 - Line contactor dropped out in
The rms line voltage calculated from the Waiting time in status o010 operation
area of each line voltage half-wave elapsed - Fuse blown on three-phase side
(average rectification value * peak value) of rectifier bridge
must be greater than the response value
for phase-failure monitoring
The interval between two identical line
voltage zeros of the voltage for the infeed
converter must not be greater than 450
deg.


F010 Inv PhaseFlt 1 Voltage failure in the regenerative - Parameter P074 wrongly set
bridge (X4-1U2/1T1, X4-1V2/1T2 - Phase failure in the rectifier
Phase failure in regenerative bridge or X4-1W2/1T3) bridge
Waiting time in status o010 - Line contactor dropped out in
The rms line voltage calculated from the 2 elapsed operation
area of each line voltage half-wave - Fuse blown on three-phase side
(average rectification value x peak value) of rectifier bridge
must be greater than the response value
for phase-failure monitoring
The interval between two identical line
voltage zeros of the voltage for the
regenerating converter must not be
greater than 450 deg..
F022 I2t Overload - - - Drive operated too long under
2 overload conditions
I t monitor of the power section has - Check to see whether the rated
responded current of the R/G unit is
adequate for the specific
The monitor responds when 100 % of the application
2
calculated I t value of the power section is - See also P785
reached.
F023 LT-Temp. 1 Heat sink temperature > 95 °C - Heat sink (air inlets and outlets)
contaminated
Temperature of the power section too high or with water-cooled units: - Heat sink temperature sensor not
heat sink temperature > 123,9 °C connected to X31, X32 on A1681
A check is made to see whether the heat and/or A1682 module (“slave
sink temperature measured using unit”)
thermistor(s) is > 95 °C (or 123,9°C) - Fan has no voltage
- Fan faulted
- Fan running in the wrong
direction
- Fan fuse (F3, F4) defective
NOTE:
- Measure inlet air ambient
temperature. If ϑ > 40 ºC, note
reduction curves. See Section
14.1.
With water-cooled units:
- Water inlet temperature too high,
cooling circuit interrupted or
cooling water pump faulty
Temperature of the power section too low 2 Heat sink temperature ≤ -45 °C - Heat sink temperature sensor not
connected to X30 module on
A1681 and/or A1682
F029 Measure Flt 1 Channel V-U faulted - Fault in the voltage path on the
(regenerative feedback power interface module (A1681
Fault in line voltage measurement direction) and/or A1682 and/or A1685) or
2 Channel V-W faulted on the electronic module (CUR)
An offset > 5% has been detected when (regenerative feedback
attempting to compensate for the offset of direction)
the line voltage measurement 3 Channel W-U faulted
(regenerative feedback
direction)
4 Channel W-U faulted
(infeed direction)
F030 DC Bus Short - - - Short-circuit in the DC link
DC link short-circuit
The monitor responds if the following

conditions obtain for longer than 0.5 sec:
- The current limit of the
rectifier/regenerating unit is reached
(this condition does not apply during
circuit identification or during DC link
forming)
- The rectifier or regenerative current is
greater than 10% of the rated DC
current (P075)
- The DC link voltage is less than 5% of
1.35*P071
F031 Fuse Blown - - - Thyristor branch fuse faulted
Fuse blown in a thyristor branch of the
rectifier/regenerating unit or of a parallel
power section.


F032 Phase Sequ.? - - - Phase sequence of the rectifier
bridge different from that of the
Wrong phase sequence regenerative bridge
A check is make to see whether the phase
sequence of the rectifier bridge is the
same as that of the regenerative bridge.
F033 DC Bus Open - - - Rectifier fuse defective
- No inverter connected
The monitor responds if the following
conditions obtain for longer than 30sec in
the "RUN“ status:
- DC link current <1%
- Output voltage of the thyristor bridge
oscillates severely
F034 Par PwrSectF 1 Current asymmetry (overcurrent or - One of the thyristors is not firing
undercurrent in the parallel power - Different current ripple in the
Fault in power sections connected in section compared with the current rectifier/regenerating unit and
parallel in the rectifier/regenerating unit) parallel power section due to
|Ibasic| - |I
parallel| > 21 % different commutating reactors
At least one parallel power section is |Iparallel| - |I
basic| > 14 % - Cable connection between the
connected, has been selected with for 300 ms rectifier/regenerating unit and a
parameter P076 and reports the fault parallel power section is
message "Current asymmetry between interrupted or faulted
rectifier/regenerating unit and parallel
power section".
F035 Ext Fault 1 - - - There is an "External fault 1"
signal at the selected binary input
External fault 1 (P575/source for "Ext. fault 1")
- The line to the corresponding
A parameter-programmable fault input has binary input is interrupted.
become active.
Active in the "RUN“ when the pre-charging binary input is interrupted..
time (P329) + 3s (200 ms for SW<3.0)
has elapsed.
A parameter-programmable fault input has

been activated.
A parameter-programmable fault input has binary input is interrupted..
been activated.
F041 EEprom-Fault 1 "Parameter value outside the - Software has been replaced
permissible range". - Excessive interference (e.g. by
Parameter range fault contactors without RC elements,
unshielded cables, faulty
Software monitoring of the permissible shielding connections ...)
value range of the parameters and the - Countermeasures:
functionality of the EEPROM chip Acknowledge the fault
(permanent memory) on electronic module Check EMC measures
CUR (type: X28C64, 8192 bytes) Set MLFB (Section 4.3.9.2)
Establish factory setting (Section
4.3.9.1)
Repeat system start-up (Section
4.2.3)
2 "EEPROM location defective" - Hardware defect
- Severe EMC noise
- Countermeasures:
Replace the CUR module
Check EMC measures.
3 "EEPROM fault" - As for 1
F042 Buffer OFlow - - - CUR module faulted

- Excessive interference (e.g. by
Internal buffer overflow contactors without RC elements,
Software monitoring of various software shielding connections ...)
buffers.


F047 Int Fault - - - CUR module faulted
Non-permissible microprocessor status contactors without RC elements,
The microprocessor is monitored by shielding connections ...)
internal hardware for non-permissible
states
F048 RAM Fault - - - RAM defective (replace the CUR
module)
RAM defective
Software-based checking of the

functionality of the RAM chips on the CUR
module
F049 Watchdog! - - - CUR module defective
Watchdog timer has triggered a Reset contactors without RC elements,
An internal hardware counter in the shielding connections)
microprocessor checks to see whether the
program for calculating the firing pulses is
executed at least about every 400 ms (on
average, it is executed every 2.7 to 3.3
ms). If this is not the case, the counter
triggers a Reset. F047 then appears.
F060 No MLFB - - - After acknowledging in
BOOTSTRAP, enter a suitable
P070=0 parameter value for the unit with
P070 MLFB (6SEE70..) (only
possible with the corresponding
access stages of the two access
parameters; see Section 4.3.9.2).
F061 WrongPar Set 3 P141 (Rectifier Induct.), P143 - Carry out circuit identification
(Inverter Induct.) or P144 (C of DC (P052 = 21)
Parameter wrong or not yet set link) are = 0.00
4 P318 is too large (with Ud reduction As the inverter step limit P776 with
selected) or P776 is set too small respect to the commutation
Note about fault value 4, 5: to facilitate constant regenerative duration (depending on uK value of
The Ud reduction is then considered to be operation with continuous DC link the network) has an upper limit,
"selected" if while the basic setting current for the current ratio of P318 has to be set lower, or Ud
P571.i001 0 active or while the standby rectifier/regenerating supply reduction has to be activated via
setting P571.i002 0 active, or if P323=1. voltage. P571if it is not currently active.
The following must apply:
USupply, reg.
P318 ≤ 100% cosP776
USupply, rect.
or.
if operating without Ud reduction:
USupply, reg.
100% ≤ 100% cosP776
USupply, rect.
5 P318 is too large (with Ud reduction P318 has to be set lower, or Ud
selected) to facilitate constant reduction has to be activated via
regenerative operation with P571if it is not currently active.
pulsating DC link current for the The following must apply:
current ratio of Usupply, regenerating
rectifier/regenerating supply P318 ≤ 87,62%
voltage. USupply, rectifier
or
if operating without Ud reduction:
USupply, regenerating
100% ≤ 87,62%
USupply, rectifier
Autotransformer connected incorrectly 6 USupply, regenerating 1

<
USupply, rectifier 1,1
7 P076 ≠ 0xx UND Unit is an E unit - Set P076 correctly
(P070 ≥ 101)
8 P076 = 10x, 20x or 21x - Set P076 correctly
(i.e. more parallel recovery power
sections are parameterized than
parallel feed power sections)


F065 SST1 Telegr. - - - Cable break
- Fault in the USS master
USS telegram to SST1 failed
Active from the first reception of a valid

protocol in all operating states
Following receipt of a valid telegram, no

further telegrams were received for longer
than the time set with parameter
P687.i001
F066 SST2 Telegr. - - - Cable break
Peer-to-peer telegram to SST1 failed
Following receipt of a valid telegram, no

further telegrams were received for longer
than the time set with parameter
P687.i003
F070 SCB Initial 1 SCB not plugged in or SCB module - Plug in the SCB
code wrong - Check the SCB and/or replace it
SCB initialization error 2 SCB not compatible - Correct the initialization data
5 Wrong initialization data
An error has occurred when initializing the 6 Timeout when initializing
SCB. 10 Error in the configuration channel
F072 SCB Heartb. - - - Replace the SCB
- Check the connection between
SCB heartbeat the module rack and the option
module
SCB no longer processes the heartbeat
counter.
F073 Sl1 AnaIn1 - - - Check the connection between
the signal source and the SCI1-
Current at analog input 1, slave 1, under 4 module (slave 1) -X428:4, 5
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
F079 SCB Telegr. - - - Check connection to the SCB
SCB telegram failure
Following a correctly received telegram,

no further telegram has been received
within the time set with parameter
P687.i002.
F080 TB/CB Init. 1 TB/CB not plugged in - Contact problem in connection
2 TB/CB not compatible between module rack and TB
An error has occurred when initializing the 5 Error in initializing data and/or CB
module at the DPR interface. 6 Timeout when initializing - Slot does not agree with
7 TB/TC module code wrong assignment (P090, P091)
- Wrong module code r723
- Wrong module compatibility r724
F081 TB/CB Heartb - - - Contact problem in connection
between module rack and TB
TB/CB heartbeat error and/or CB
- Hardware fault (replace TB
TB or CB has stopped processing the and/or CB)
heartbeat counter.


F082 TB/CB Telegr 1 CB alarm channel faulty -
2 TB alarm channel faulty
TB/CB telegram failure 3 TB error channel faulty
4 CB task channel (CB → CUR)
The exchange of data has been 5 faulty
interrupted. CB answer channel (CUR → CB)
6 faulty
P695 defines the telegram failure time 7 Internal error
8 TB task channel (TB → CUR) faulty
TB answer channel (CUR → TB)
9 faulty
10 Internal error
11 CB/TB Telegram failure
PMU task channel (CUR → TB)
12 faulty
PMU answer channel (TB → CUR)
21 faulty
22 CB/TB setpoint channel faulty
CB/TB actual value channel faulty
F090 Circuit ID F 1 If generating mode is inhibited - Set P076 = x2
(P076 = xx1), circuit identification
Circuit identification not possible is not possible!
2 If α = 30°, not enough rectifier - Connection to DC link interrupted
current flows (less than 25% of the
rated DC current with
P160=150.0% or less than 10%
with P160=60.0%)
3 P141 (Rectifier Induct.) and/or - Commutating inductance too low
P143 (Inverter Induct.) and/or P144 (see Section 3.1)
(C for DC link) could not be - Connection to DC link interrupted
identified
4 A waiting time of 20s has already - Another unit is supplying the DC
elapsed but the circuit identification link
cannot be carried out because the - Wait until the DC link has
DC link voltage is too high discharged sufficiently, then start
(Ud>20% of 1.35*P071) circuit identification again
F091 Circuit ID C 1 The abort took place because the -
RUN or "R" status was exited for
Circuit identification or forming aborted some reason (e.g. brief power
due to external cause. outage) during forming or circuit
identification.
If circuit identification is aborted, only 2 The abort took place because the
those parameters are modified whose reserve data set selection changed
assignment was completed before this during forming or circuit
fault occurred. identification.
3 The abort took place because the
OFF command was given.
4 The abort took place because an
ON command was not given within
20 sec after selecting the forming
function (P052=20) or the circuit
identification function (P052=21)
5 The abort took place because the
"Inhibit regenerating" command
was given during circuit
identification (see control word 1,
bit 12 and P572)


F103 Thy/Grnd Flt 1 Short-circuit of thyristor V11 or V24 - Thyristor defective
- Thyristor externally shorted
Fault when conducting the 2 Short-circuit of thyristor V12 or V25 (e.g. by ground fault in grounded
thyristor/ground-fault test system and ground fault in the
3 Short-circuit of thyristor V13 or V26 motor)
This fault message can only occur if the - Connection to DC link interrupted
thyristor/ground-fault test is activated with 4 Short-circuit of thyristor V14 or V21 (e.g. fuse blown)
parameters P353 / P354.
A software check is made to see whether 5 Short-circuit of thyristor V15 or V22 Possible reasons for the thyristor
all thyristors have blocking capability, being defective:
whether they can be fired, and whether 6 Short-circuit of thyristor V16 or V23 - Interruption in the RC circuit
there is a ground fault - Converter and compensation
Identification of the firing lines and the control not optimized (excessive
associated thyristors should always be current peaks)
made with the aid of the relevant wiring - Cooling not guaranteed (e.g. fan
diagram (see Section 3-5 "Power not running, ambient temperature
terminals"). too high, to little air intake, heat
sink severely contaminated)
- Excessive voltage peaks in
supply system
8 Ground fault in DC link or in motor - Ground fault
/ rectifier fuse defective - Connection to DC link interrupted
(e.g. fuse blown)
9 I = 0 - Message defective - CUR module defect
11 Thyristor cannot be fired (X11) - Firing pulse line to relevant

12 Thyristor cannot be fired (X12) thyristor interrupted
13 Thyristor cannot be fired (X13) - Ribbon cable X109 not correctly
14 Thyristor cannot be fired (X14) plugged in or interrupted (and
15 Thyristor cannot be fired (X15) ribbon cable X27 in the case of
16 Thyristor cannot be fired (X16) power section connected in
parallel)
- Defect in electronics and/or
power interface module
- internal interruption on the gate
line in the thyristor module
17 2 or more thyristors of the rectifier - Connection to DC link interrupted
bridge cannot be fired (e.g. fuse blown)
- As under 11 to 16
21 Thyristor cannot be fired (X21) - As under 11 to 16
22 Thyristor cannot be fired (X22)
27 2 or more thyristors of the - Parameter P076 wrong
regenerative bridge cannot be fired - As under 11 to 16
31 Thyristor cannot block - As under 1 to 6
(gate X11 or X21)
32 Thyristor cannot block
(gate X12 or X22)
(gate X13 or X23)
(gate X14 or X24)
(gate X15 or X25)
(gate X16 or X26)
F116 Fault on the intelligent I/O module - - -
to
F150 See User's Manual of the TB module

7.2 Alarm messages

The warning message appears periodically as A=Alarm/Warning and a three-digit in the display of the PMU A
warning cannot be acknowledged. It extinguishes automatically when the cause of the warning is eliminated.
Several messages may occur at the same time, in which case they appear one after the other in the display.
If the common rectifier is operated with the OP1S operator panel, the warning appears in the bottom line of the
display. The red LED starts blinking first (see the operating instructions for the OP1S)
Alarm Parameter Description Countermeasures

No. No.

Bit No.
A015 P953 ext.Warn 1 External warning arrived! Check whether the line to the
 Parameter-programmable external warning input 1 relevant binary input is interrupted.
has been activated Check parameter P588 Src No Ext Warn 1.
14 See also Section 4.3.2.
A016 P953 ext. Warn 2 External warning arrived! Check whether the line to the
 Parameter-programmable external warning input 1 relevant binary input is interrupted.
has been activated Check parameter P589 Src No Ext Warn 2.
15 See also Section 4.3.2.
A022 P954 LT-Temp. Measure inlet air and/or ambient temperature. If ϑ >
 The heat sink temperature is > 90 °C 40°C, note the reduction curves. See Section 14.1.
5 Check
or with water-cooled units:
- whether fan -E1(-E2) is connected and rotating in the
The heat sink temperature is > 118 °C
right direction.
- whether the air inlet and outlet openings are clean and
clear.
- the connection of the temperature sensor to -X30
(-X31, -X32).
With water-cooled units:
- Water inlet temperature too high, cooling circuit
interrupted or cooling water pump faulty
A025 P954 I2t Warning Check whether the rated DC current of the
rectifier/regenerating unit is adequate for the specific
 2
The I t value of the power section is too high. The application.
8 warning is triggered when 90% of the permissible
I2t value is reached. See also under fault F022 and
parameter P785. The permissible I2t value is
reached at the maximum permissible load cycle
(see Section 14, Figure 14.1)

Alarm Parameter Description Countermeasures

No. No.

Bit No.
A049 P956 no Slave P660 SCI AnalogInConf
 In the case of serial I/O (SCB1 with SCI1/2), no Check the slave.
0 slave is connected and/or the fiber optic conductor Check the cable.
is interrupted or the slaves have no voltage.
A050 P956 Slave not ok Check P660 SCI AnalogInConf
 In the case of serial I/O, the slaves required
1 according to the parameter settings are not
available (slave number an/or slave type).
A051 P956 Peer Bdrate Match the baud rates of the SCB modules connected to
 In a peer-to-peer connection, the baud rate each (P684 SST/SCB Baudrate)
2 selected is too high and/pr different
A052 P956 Peer PrD-L Reduce the number of words

 In a peer-to-peer connection, an excessive P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat.
3 process data length has been set (>5).
A053 P956 Peer Lng f.

 In a peer-to-peer connection, the process data Match the word lengths of the sender and receiver
4 length of the sender and receiver do not agree P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat
A065 P957 Auto Restart Important

 The line voltage is outside the tolerance band at An auto restart may constitute a danger for persons and
0 the moment (e.g. power outage). The firing pulses property. Make sure you really want to have auto restart
are therefore inhibited. On power recovery, (WEA).
however, the WEA option (P366) implements an If necessary, change P366 WEA.
auto restart.
A081.. r958 CB Warning 1...16
A096  See user's manual for the CB module
0...15
A097.. r959 TB Warning 1 16
A112  See user's manual for the TB module
0...15
A113.. r960 TB Warning 17...32
A128  See user's manual for the TB module
0...15

06.01 Maintenance
8 Maintenance
WARNING
The common rectifiers are operated with high voltages.
All work on the unit must be carried out in agreement with the national electrical regulations
(in Germany: VBG 4).
Maintenance and repair work must only be carried out by qualified personnel.
Use must only be made of the spare parts approved by the manufacturer.
It is imperative to observe the prescribed maintenance intervals and the repair and
replacement instructions.
As the result of the dc link capacitors in the connected SIMOVERT Master Drives, the unit
still contains a hazardous voltage up to 5 min. after isolation (power terminal and electronic
power supply). This is why it is only permitted to open the unit after observing an
appropriate waiting time.
In spite of de-energisation of the power connections and discharge of the DC link the
snubber capacitors remain charged with the gate control module A23 disconnected.
The power and control terminals may still be live even in the event of motor standstill.
Despite disconnecting the power terminals from the supply, terminal X19 may still be live
due to the external fan supply.
If work on the activated unit is necessary:
♦ do not touch any live parts.
♦ use only proper measuring equipment and protective work clothing.
♦ stand or sit on an unearthed and isolated surface that does justice to ESD requirements.
You should know the order and factory numbers of your unit when consulting the service department. You will
find these numbers and other important data on the rating plate of the unit.
8.1 Maintenance recommendations

The fans are designed for a service life of 40,000 hours at an ambient temperature of TA = 40 °C. To guarantee
the availability of the unit at all times, the fans must be replaced in good time.

Maintenance 0601
8.2 Replacing components

8.2.1 Replacing the fan
WARNING
The fan must only be replaced by qualified personnel.
As a result of the DC link capacitors and snubber capacitors in the connected
inverters, a hazardous voltage still exists for up to 5 min after isolation.
Size H
The fan is located in the fan box on the top of the unit. M8 M8
♦ Unplug X20.
♦ Undo both M8 (SW 13) fixing screws. Fan E1
X20
♦ Loosen the two M4 fixing screws and swing the plastic
cover out sideways..
♦ Pull the fan box out of the unit forwards as far as the M4
stop.
♦ Then lift it up over the stop (at the back) and remove it
completely from the unit.
Figure 8.1 Fan (AC 230V) for size H
♦ Installation is carried out in reverse order.
Important!
The two M8 fixing screws are used to earth the fan
box, so they must be screwed down firmly.
Size K
M8
The two fans are located in the fan box on the top of the
unit.
♦ Unplug X20.
♦ Undo both M8 (SW 13) fixing screws.
Fan E1 Fan E2
♦ Pull the fan box out of the unit forwards.
♦ Installation is carried out in reverse order.
X20
Figure 8.2 Fan (AC 230V) for size K
WARNING
The fan box weighs approx. 16 kg for size H, and approx. 32 kg for size K. This must be
taken into account when removing the fan box.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in severe personal injury or considerable
property damage.

06.01 Maintenance
8.2.2 Replacing modules
WARNING
Modules must only be replaced by qualified persons.
Modules must not be removed or inserted under a live voltage.
CAUTION
The modules contain electrostatically sensitive devices. You must discharge your own body
before touching an electronic module. This is best done by touching a conductive earthed
object (e.g. a bare metal part of the control cabinet) directly beforehand.
Replacing modules in the

electronics box
♦ Undo the securing screws
of the modules above and
below the insertion /removal
S lo t 1 (C U R )
aids.
S lot 3 (O ptio n s)
♦ By means of the insertion S lot 2 (O ptio n s)
/removal aids, carefully pull
the module out of the
electronics box, making
sure that the module does
not get stuck.
♦ Carefully insert the new
module in the guide rails
until it moves no further in
the electronics box.
♦ Firmly screw down the
module with the securing
screws above and below
the insertion / removal aids.
Figure 8.3 Electronics box, equipped with CUR (slot 1)

and options (slots 2 and 3)

Maintenance 0601
NOTE
When replaced under MLFB 6SE7090-0XX85-1DA0, the PCB electronics CUR (C98043-A1680) is supplied
programmed without EPROM (software). The EPROM programmed (last state) must be ordered separately,
as must the operating instructions for a new software version.
Example of replacement part ordering of a CUR with accessories:
PCB electronics (CUR) 6SE7090-0XX85-1DA0
EPROM programmed 6SW1701-0DA14
Operating instructions Common Rectifier e.g. German/English 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0
Assigning the "Start-up" parameters for the CUR option module (A10)
For general information see Chapter 4
F060
P and Higher key Switch over from fault display to parameterization
P051 = 3 Access stage "Expert mode“
P052 = 2 MLFB setting (initialization)
P070 = WARNING
Initialization is mandatory.
Specify the ID number of the MLFB in P070 of the
common rectifier (rating plate on the unit) as per MLFB
table Section 4.3.9.2.
P052 = 0 Return from setting MLFB
P and Lower key Change back to fault display and

P-key acknowledge F060
See Section
4.2.2 or 4.2.3
WARNING
Replacing firing-circuit module A23
Carry out circuit identification after replacing the A23 (see Chapter 4).
The earth connection must be restored by tightening the screws marked with an earthing
sign on the electronics box (size H) or on the electronics slide-in unit (size K).

06.01 Maintenance
Replacing the EPROM on the CUR module (upgrading to a new software version)
On setup and during servicing work, the current parameter settings in the logbook in Chapter 12 should be
saved For information on reading out the parameters changed from the factory settings easily, see Section
4.3.9.3 (saving the parameter values using SIMOVIS) and Section 4.3.9.8 (displaying modified parameters). It
should be checked that these entries are up-to-date before the EPROM is replaced because when the
electronics supply voltage is switched on again, the function "generate factory settings" is carried out
automatically (see Section 4.3.9.1). Then only the values of parameters P070 and P077 are retained.
WARNING
The EPROM must only be replaced by qualified persons. The EPROM must
not be removed or inserted under a live voltage.
Non-observance of warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury
or considerable property damage.
The EPROM is located in slot D14 of module CUR.
CAUTION
The modules contain electrostatically sensitive devices. You must discharge your own
body before touching an electronic module. This is best done by touching a conductive
earthed object (e.g. a bare metal part of the control cabinet) directly beforehand.
Procedure for replacing EPROMs:

♦ Switch off electronics supply voltage
♦ Undo fixing screws for module CUR above and below the insertion/removal aids
♦ Remove the module from the electronics box carefully with the help of the insertion/removal aids.
♦ Remove old EPROM carefully from the socket and replace it with a new EPROM. It is important to ensure
that the EPROM is mounted the right way round (pin 1 aligned correctly) and that pins are not bent
♦ Slide module into the electronics box carefully in the guide rails as far as the stop
♦ Screw the module into place again using the fixing screws
♦ After switching the electronics supply voltage on again, wait until the function "generate factory setting" is
complete. Then restore the parameter values in accordance with the logbook or reload the values saved
using SIMOVIS into the unit.
♦ If the parameters are restored in accordance with the logbook, circuit identification (see Section 4.3.9.7) must
be carried out (due to special parameter P772).

Maintenance 0601
8.2.3 Power interface module spare parts
Load resistors:
NOTE
Replacement modules are supplied without load resistors (e.g. take them over from the original module)!
No liability will be accepted for damage caused by the installation of incorrect load resistors.
If the load resistors (R75 to R78) are not installed, the converter will be destroyed.
Dimensioning of the load resistors:
Idav [A] R75 R76 R77 R78 R79 R80

Rating plate [ Ω] [ Ω] [ Ω]
Voltage class 480V

821 4,7 10 10
1023 4.7 4,7 12
1333 18 12 12
1780 8,2 11 12
Voltage class 600V
774 4,7 11 12
1023 4,7 4,7 12
1285 10 33 12
1464 12 12 13
1880 8,2 10 11
Voltage class 690V
774 4,7 11 12
1023 4,7 4,7 12
1285 10 33 12
1464 12 12 13
1880 8,2 10 11
Resistors of series W97041.. tolerance: 0.50% for R ≤ 10Ω

0.25% for 10Ω < R < 47Ω R79 and R80 not envisaged on A1681.
0.10% for R ≥ 47Ω
The load resistance setpoint refers to the DC link current Idav stated on the rating plate.

06.01 Maintenance
Position of the load resistors:
X47
X29
X19
2 1 3 2 1
R 76
R 78
R 80
F4 7A T 25 0V
F3 7A T 25 0V
C98043-A1685
2A T 25 0V
2A T 25 0V
2A T 25 0V
R 79
R 77
R 75
F5
F1
F2
1 5
X9 X9
X48

Maintenance 0601
8.2.4 Replacing thyristor blocks
8.2.4.1 Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size H
8 8 11
2
11 8
7 7 10
G G G G G
K K K K K
10 7
5
Level B Level A
4
12 9
Front thyristor block, level A (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 4kg)

• Swing up the door α after loosening the 2 M4 slit Torx screws σ.
• Detach cable δ from the modules and the screen fixture.
• Remove the 2 M6 hexagon head screws φ and swing out the electronic assembly tray to the stop.
• Only in the case of disassembly of the centre thyristor assembly, open the 4 twist-loks γ and release the
cable η for the thermocouple sensor, which is mounted on the centre heat sink only.
• Unplug the gate and cathode cables (G, K) ϕ.
• Remove the 2 M8 hexagon head screws κ and swing out the thyristor assembly to the front.
• Loosen M6 nut λ and pull the thyristor block out upwards at an angle.
Rear thyristor block, level B (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 4 kg)

• Unplug the gate and cathode cables(G, K) ;.
• Remove 2 M8 hexagon-head bolts Α.
• Loosen M6 nut Σ and pull the thyristor block out upwards at an angle.
The thyristor blocks are installed in the reverse order.

06.01 Maintenance
8.2.4.2 Disassembling the thyristor blocks for size K
3
8
8
Level B Level A
GK GK GK 10 6
6 12
1
12
7
13 9
5
3
11
5 4
11
5
Front thyristor block, level A (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 12 kg)

• Remove the 2 covers α by loosening 4 M4 hexagon head screws σ and 3 M4 hexagon head screws δ.
• Remove the copper plate φ by removing 4 M10 hexagon-head bolts γ.
• Unplug the gate and cathode cables (G, K) η.
• Only in the case of disassembly of the centre thyristor assembly, remove the thermocouple sensor, which is
mounted on the centre thyristor assembly only by loosening the screw ϕ (Torx drive T25).
• Loosen the two M10 hexagon-head screws κ and swing the thyristor block out forwards.
• Loosen M10 nut λ and pull the thyristor block out upwards at an angle.
Rear thyristor block, level B (weight of a thyristor block, approx. 12 kg)

• Unplug gate and cathode cables (G, K) ;.
• Remove 2 M10 hexagon-head screws Α.
• Remove 2 M10 hexagon-head screws Σ.
• Loosen M10 nut ∆, swing the thyristor block out forwards and pull the thyristor block out upwards at an angle.
The thyristor blocks are installed in the reverse order.

Maintenance 0601

06.01 Options
9 Options
9.1 Options which can be integrated into the electronics box
One or two option boards, listed in Table 9.1, can be inserted in the electronics box using the LBA option (Local
Bus Adapter, backplane wiring).
For use of modules CBC and CBP2, an ADB (adapter board) is required in addition to the LBA. These modules
must be plugged into an ADB because of their smaller mechanical dimensions before they can be plugged into
an electronics box.
Designation Description Order No.

LBA Local bus adapter for the electronics box 6SE7090-0XX84-4HA0
LBA is always needed to install supplementary boards
ADB Adapter board 6SX7010-0KA00
ADB is always needed to install CBC, CBP, EB1, EB2, SBP and
SLB boards
CBP2 Communications board with interface for SINEC- L2-DP 6SX7010-0FF05
(PROFIBUS)
(miniature-format board; ADB required)
CBC Communications board with interface for CAN protocol 6SX7010-0FG00
(miniature-format board; ADB required)
SCB1 Serial communications board with fiber-optic cable for serial I/O 6SE7090-0XX84-0BC0
system and peer-to-peer connection
Description 6SE7080-0CX84-0BC0
SCB2 Serial communications board for peer-to-peer connection and USS 6SE7090-0XX84-0BB0
protocol via RS485
Description 6SE7080-0CX84-0BB0
Use of the serial interface with USS protocol 6SE7087-6CX87-4KB0
T100 Module incl. hardware operating instructions without software 6SE7090-0XX87-0BB0
module
Hardware operating instructions for T100 6SE7080-0CX87-0BB0
MS100 MS100 "Universal Drive“ software module for T100 (EPROM) 6SE7098-0XX84-0BB0
without manual
Manual for MS100 "Universal Drive" software module
German 6SE7080-0CX84-0BB1
English 6SE7087-6CX84-0BB1
French 6SE7087-7CX84-0BB1
Spanish 6SE7087-8CX84-0BB1
Italian 6SE7087-2CX84-0BB1
T300 Technology board with 2 connecting leads, SC58 and SC60, 6SE7090-0XX87-4AH0
terminal block SE300 and hardware operating instructions
T400 Technology board (incl. short description) 6DD1606-0AD0
Hardware and configuring manual 6DD1903-0EA0
Table 9.1 Option boards and bus adapter

Options 06.01
The following additional modules can be supplied under two order numbers
• under the order number of the board without accessories (such as connectors and Short Guide)
• as a retrofit kit: Board with connectors and Short Guide
Board Order number of board (w/o accessories) Order number of retrofit kit
ADB 6SE7090-0XX84-0KA0 6SX7010-0KA00
CBP2 6SE7090-0XX84-0FF5 6SX7010-0FF05
CBC 6SE7090-0XX84-0FG0 6SX7010-0FG00
Slots in the electronics box Boards

Left Slot 1 (CUR) CUR
Center Slot 3 (options) CB1 / SCB1 / SCB2 / CBC (with ADB) / CBP (with ADB)
Right Slots 2 (options) CB1 / CB2 / CBP (with ADB) / CBC (with ADB) / SCB1 /
SCB2 / T100 / T300
NOTE
Only one of each option board type may inserted in the electronics box.
TB (technology boards, e.g. T300) must always be inserted at slot 2.
If only one option board is used it must always be inserted at slot 2.
Small format modules (CBP and CBC) must be plugged in on the adapter board on the right or below (in Slot E
or if a technology module is also used in Slot G).
Use of Slots D and F on adapter boards is not possible because the module plugged in there is not detected by
the basic device.
Table 9.2 Slots for option boards in the electronics box
Local bus adapter (LBA) for mounting optional supplementary boards

Optional supplementary boards can be installed only in conjunction with the LBA option. If an LBA is not already
fitted in the common rectifier, one must be installed in the electronics box to accommodate the optional board.
How to install an LBA local bus adapter in the electronics box:

- Undo the two fixing screws on the CUR board
and pull board out by special handles.
- Push LBA bus extension into electronics box
(see picture on right for position) until it
engages.
- Insert CUR board in left-hand board location
again and tighten fixing screws in handles.
Location 2 (Optionen)
Location 3 (Optionen
Location 1 (CUD1)

06.01 Options
1 3 2
Boards Current drain (mA)
Arrangement of 24V DC supply
board locations 1 to 3
F D and slots D to G in CB1 190
C electronics box
U CBP 150
R
CB2 100
G E
CBC 100
SCB1 50
SCB2 150
Current input of DC 24V power supply (X9): T100 550
The figures are required in addition to the 1A T300 without tacho 620
consumed by the basic unit.
Table 9.3 Current drain of the option boards
9.2 Interfacebaugruppen
The boards listed in the following table must be installed externally and connected to the installation side (for
start-up, see Section 4.4.4 “Procedure for commissioning the serial I/O board SCB1” and the description of the
board).
Desig- Description Order No.

nation
SCI1 Serial I/O board (only in conjunction with SCB1). Board 6SE7090-0XX84-3EA0
description 6SE7080-0CX84-0BC0
Analog and binary input and outputs for coupling to the
SCB1 via fiber-optic cable
SCI2 Serial I/O board (only in conjunction with SCB1) Board 6SE7090-0XX84-3EF0
description 6SE7080-0CX84-0BC0
Binary inputs and outputs for coupling to the SCB1 via
fiber-optic cable.
Table 9.4 Interface boards
9.3 Power Supply

A SITOP power supply as described in Catalog KT10 is recommended for the common rectifier (connector X9).

Options 06.01
9.4 Operator control panel OP1S
Option Beschreibung
OP1S User-friendly operator control panel with plain text
display
Order No.: 6SE7090-0XX84-2FK0
Table 9.5 Operator control options

Fault
Run
The optional comfort version of the operator panel with a I

plaintext display is plugged into the position in the device door
intended for that purpose. O P
It is thus connected to the serial basic device interface SST1.

Jog 7 8 9
If the UP or DOWN keys of the OP1S is used to select
adjacent parameter numbers, the missing numbers are
4 5 6
skipped in the range of the basic device parameters.
1 2 3
With parameters of a technology module, this automatic
skipping of missing numbers is not possible. In that case, the
0 +/- Reset
numbers of the existing parameters must be entered directly.
Figure 9.1 OP1S
The OP1S provides the option of selecting parameters directly by entering their number on the keyboard. The
following applies:
Displayed number Number to be entered on the OP1S
Basic device
rxxx, Pxxx (0)xxx
parameter
Parameter of a
Hxxx, dxxx 1xxx
technology module
A few seconds after initialization of the OP1S, the display

automatically switches to the operating display. Operating display
From the operating display, you can enter the basic menu by <R>
pressing the key. Here either "free access" to all parameters or
different functions can be selected. Details of the functions can be
found in the OP1S operating instructions. Basic menu
In the state "free access", parameterization of the device is <R>

possible.
Free access
If you press the <R> key (several times if necessary), you can
return to the operating display.

06.01 Options
With SIMOVERT 6SE70 the following values are displayed on the operating display:
1st line DC link current actual value r035 [%] DC link voltage r006 [V] Bus addr.
2nd line # DC link voltage actual value r037 [%]
3rd line * DC link voltage setpoint r036 [%]
4th line Operating state r001
The following parameters affect the function of the OP1S or of the interface SST1:
P050 (language selection), P051 (access level), P053 (parameterization enable), P054 (OP backlighting), P683
to P687 (interface settings)
Control bits of the operator panel OP1S:

(See also the operating instructions for the OP1S)
Communication between the OP1S and the SIMOREG device 6RA70 is performed via the interface G-SST1
(RS485) using the GPI protocol.
By pressing the appropriate key on the OP1S, it is possible to execute functions. The OP1S sets the appropriate
control word bit in PZD word 1 by means of transmission by the GPI protocol. (For details of the control word
bits, see Chapter 4.3.1.1)
For activation of the required function, parameterization as shown in the table below is required.
Key on OP1S Function Bit in PZD word 1 Activation by

On/off key (I / 0) ON / OFF1 Bit 0 P554 = 2001
Reset Acknowledgment *) Bit 7 P565, P566, or P567 = 2001
Jog Jogging Bit 8 P568 = 2001
Reversal Ud reduction Bit 11 P571 = 2001
Regenerative Bit 12 P572 = 2001
feedback enable
*) Acknowledgment of the fault messages using the <Reset> key of the OP1S is only possible in the operating
display, i.e. the operating display must first have been selected by pressing the <Reset> key (several times).
Independently of that, acknowledgment is always possible by pressing the key on the PMU.
NOTE
The predecessor of the OP1S (the OP1) cannot be used with software version V4.0 and higher because of its
differing coupling mechanisms! The OP1S, however, is a suitable replacement for the OP1 if used with older
device software.
9.5 RS485 interface (PTP1)

The SST2 serial interface for the basic unit is not available until submodule A2 (C98043-A1690-L1) has been
plugged into the CUR electronics module (A10).
With the parameterization P688=1, the peer-to-peer transmission protocol is implemented on SST2.
The RS485 interface cable required for peer-to-peer coupling to a second unit is described in Section 3.8.7.

Options 06.01
9.5.1 Order designation
Three different versions of this module (short designation PTP1, item number C98043-A1690-L1, equipment
identifier A2) can be ordered. The order numbers (MLFB) for these versions are:
1. Module PTP1 with two spacers (1 module) MLFB: 6SE7090-0XX85-1NA0
2. Standard package for 12-pulse mode (2 PTP1 modules with two

spacers for each of two units) MLFB: 6SE7090-0XX85-1TA0
3. Retrofitting package for 12-pulse mode (2 PTP1 modules with two

spacers, 2 CUR control electronics modules and two EPROMs
with up-to-date software for two units) MLFB: 6SE7090-0XX85-1TB0
Versions 1 and 2 require a CUR control electronics module of hardware version 06 or higher (indicated on the
fourth number block of the item number on the module: C98043-A1680-L1-06, C98043-A1680-L1-07, ...) and
software version 3.0 or higher (see the label on the EPROM, fourth number block must be 30 or higher: V98113-
A1800-A001-30, V98113-A1800-A001-31, ... The software version can also be read from parameter r720.01.
The contents must be 3.0 or greater).
9.5.2 Assembly
• Undo the fixing screws α of the CUR (A10) above and below the
c
removal handles σ.
d
• Remove the module carefully from the electronics box using the
handles σ.
A10
CUR
• Versions 1 and 2: Module PTP1 is a submodule δ of the CUR. The
PTP1 is fitted to the electronics module using the preassembled PMU
spacers. The female rods X115 and X116 must be fitted onto the
corresponding male pins on the CUR.
X100
• Version 3: The PTP1 and EPROM are already fitted to the CUR.
X101
• Slide CUR module (A10) with PTP1 (A2) into the electronics box
X102 X115
carefully along the guide rails as far as the stop.
X117
• Screw the module into position with the fixing screws α above and X104 X116
below the removal handles σ.
d
c e
9.5.3 Function and terminal description
See circuit diagram in Section 3.5 "Single-line diagrams with suggested circuit arrangements".
Function Terminal Connected values / Description
RS485 serial interface X117-1 RS485R + receive cable RS485 positive

(SST2) X117-2 RS485R - receive cable RS485 negative
X117-3 RS485T+ send cable RS485 positive
X117-4 RS485T- send cable RS485 negative
X117-5 Signal earth

06.01 Options
The bus termination resistors required for peer-to-peer mode are installed on the module::
• 150Ω between terminal X117-1 and terminal X117-2
• 390Ω from terminal X117-1 to +5V supply
• 390Ω from terminal X117-2 to ground
9.5.4 Parameterization
The following parameters influence the function of the SST2 interface for the basic unit (for details see Section
5.12):
P681 (i001 to i005) Selection of process data for transmission
P684.i003 Baudrate
P686.i003 Number of net data words for peer-to-peer link
P687.i003 Telegram failure time
P688 Selection of the protocol
Parameterization for "12-pulse mode" see Section 3.8.3.
9.6 SIMOVIS
WARNING
Only qualified personnel who are familiar with the SIMOVIS operating
instructions and with the operating instructions of the connected devices and
their safety instructions are permitted to intervene at the drive using the PC.
Incorrect use of the software can result in death, severe personal injury or
What is SIMOVIS?
SIMOVIS is a program that runs on standard PCs for the setup and diagnostics of converters.
The connection between SIMOVIS on the PC and the converter units is implemented via the serial interface
(X300 on the PMU or X100 on the module CUR) using the GPI protocol.
NOTE
Communication can be effected either via the terminal strip of the CUR-X100 (RS485 interface) or the interface
connector of the PMU-X300 (9-way SUB D connector, RS485-/RS232 interface).
It is only possible to operate one of the two possible connections (X100 or X300)!
X100 is only implemented as an RS485 interface.

On hardware version 07 and higher of the electronics board (C98043-A1680-L1-07), X300 is implemented as a
combined RS485/RS232 interface. This makes it possible to establish the connection between the X300 and the
serial interface on the PC (COM1 or COM2) also using the RS232 .
Up to hardware version 06 and higher, X300 was only a RS485 interface. An interface adapter must therefore be
used for the connection between X300 and the serial interface on the PC, if the PC does not have an RS485
interface.
An RS485/RS232 adapter is available under order number 6SX7005-0AA00.

Options 06.01
SIMOVIS functions
• Menu-driven setting up using the PC: all parameters can be set that are required for operation.
• Reading and writing any preferred parameter sets (Upread, Download).
• Setting and monitoring all parameters of the unit using graphical methods.
• Operation of the unit via screen forms. Issuing control commands.
• Evaluation of faults and alarms: Overview of faults and alarms for all equipment connected to the bus.
SIMOVIS is supplied with every unit, on diskette, in the diskette pocket at the back of the manual
(DOS SIMOVIS).
The installation and operating instructions for the software is supplied in the form of a Windows WRITE file and
as an ASCII text file on the installation disks:
ANLEITNG.WRI .............Operating instructions in Windows Write format

ANLEITNG.TXT ..............Operating instructions in ASCII text format.
If WINDOWS (Version 3.1 upwards) is installed on your PC, you can load ANLEITNG.WRI into MS-WRITE and
print it out (7 pages).
It is also possible under DOS to print out the file ANLEITNG.TXT.
In order to accommodate the different number of lines per page for different printers, page divisions were
omitted.
The simplest way to print the file out is as follows:
COPY ANLEITNG.TXT LPT1:
Please note that an ASCII character set is active on a laser printer (e.g. PC-8) ; and that a printer with endless
paper is set to "Skip over perforation".

06.01 Spare-parts
10 Spare Parts
For common rectifiers sizes H and K
Equipment Designation Order number Used in

identifier
A10 PCB electronics (CUR) without 6SE7090-0XX85-1DA0 all unit types -0AA0
EPROM
D14 Software (EPROM) 6SW1701-0DA14 all unit types
A23 PCB - Power Interface 6SE7041-8EK85-0HA0 6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
A23 PCB - Power Interface 6SE7041-8GK85-0HA0 6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
A23 PCB - Power Interface 6SE7041-8EK85-0LA0 6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
A23 PCB - Power Interface 6SE7041-8GK85-0LA0 6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
PMU Parameterization unit 6SE7090-0XX84-2FA00 all unit types -0AA0
Level A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB40 6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
network
Level B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB41 6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
network
Level A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB42 6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
network
Level B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB43 6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
network
Level A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB44 6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
network 6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
Level B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB45 6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
Level A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB46 6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
Level B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB47 6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
Level A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB51 6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
network

Spare-parts 06.01

identifier
Level B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB52 6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
network
Level A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB53 6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
network
Level B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB54 6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
network
Level A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB55 6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
network 6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
Level B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB56 6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
Level A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB63 6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
network
Level B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB64 6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
network
Level A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB65 6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
network
Level B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB66 6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
network
Level A Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB67 6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
network 6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
Level B Thyristor block with snubber RC 6SY7010-0AB68 6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
F1, F5 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA01 all unit types
F2, F3, F4 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA23 all unit types
F11 to F16 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA22 6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
F111 to F162 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA22 6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
F11-F16 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA12 6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0

06.01 Spare-parts

identifier
F111 to F162 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA12 6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
F11 to F16 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA11 6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
F111 to F162 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA11 6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
F111 to F162 Fuse link 6SY7010-2AA21 6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
R100 NTC thermistor 6SY7010-6AA02 all unit types
E1 Fan 6SY7010-7AA02 6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0
E1, E2 Fan 6SY7010-7AA02 6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0
T1, T2 Current transformer 6SY7010-5AA03 6SE7038-2EH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0EH85-0AA0
6SE7037-7FH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0FH85-0AA0
6SE7037-7HH85-0AA0
6SE7041-0HH85-0AA0

Spare-parts 06.01

identifier
T1, T2 Current transformer 6SY7010-5AA04 6SE7041-3EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8EK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8FK85-0AD0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-3HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-5HK85-0AD0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AA0
6SE7041-8HK85-0AD0

06.01 Logbook
12 Logbook
The logbook must be kept up-to-date by the operating personnel.
All service and maintenance work carried out on the common rectifier should be entered briefly in keywords into
the logbook.
NOTE
The software used for common rectifier is identical to that used for the rectifier/regenerating units of the
equipment series 6SE70.
The functional difference between common rectifier and rectifier/regenerating units is defined by means of the
parameter P070.
All the parameters are listed in this chapter. Parameters, which are not employed for the common rectifier
(designated by **" in the parameter list of Chapter 5), should be ignored.
Continuous entries are important for maintenance and could be significant when it comes to warranty claims.
Similarly, in the event of software upgrading, it is important that a record of the parameter settings is available,
because during this procedure all values are reset to their original factory settings.
Location: ....................................................... Unit Order No.: ..................................................

Serial No.: ..................................................
Date Name Department Signature
Start-up settings
Start-up settings
change
Par- Parameter Factory setting Start-up setting Start-up setting

No. designation change
P050 Language 0
P051 Access Level 2
P052 Function select 0
P053 Parameter Access 6
P054 Display Light 0
P070 MLFB(6SE70 ... ) 0
P071 Line Volts dependent on P070
P074 Limit LowVoltage 61
P075 Rtd Amps dependent on P070
P076 Config. PCircuit 002
P077 Factory set.type 0
P090 Board Position 2 0
P091 Board Position 3 0
P140 Rectifier Resist i001=0.000 i001= i001=
i002=0.000 i002= i002=
i003=0.000 i003= i003=
i004=0.000 i004= i004=
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 12-1

Logbook 06.01

P141 Rectifier Induct i001=0.00 i001= i001=
i002=0.00 i002= i002=
i003=0.00 i003= i003=
i004=0.00 i004= i004=
P142 Inverter Resist. i001=0.000 i001= i001=
i002=0.000 i002= i002=
i003=0.000 i003= i003=
i004=0.000 i004= i004=
P143 Inverter Induct. i001=0.00 i001= i001=
i002=0.00 i002= i002=
i003=0.00 i003= i003=
i004=0.00 i004= i004=
P144 DC Bus Capacit. i001=0.00 i001= i001=
i002=0.00 i002= i002=
i003=0.00 i003= i003=
i004=0.00 i004= i004=
P160 Motor Curr Limit i001=150.0 i001= i001=
i002=150.0 i002= i002=
i003=150.0 i003= i003=
i004=150.0 i004= i004=
P161 Regen Curr Limit i001=-150.0 i001= i001=
i002=-150.0 i002= i002=
i003=-150.0 i003= i003=
i004=-150.0 i004= i004=
P310 DC Curr Reg Gain i001=0.15 i001= i001=
i002=0.15 i002= i002=
i003=0.15 i003= i003=
i004=0.15 i004= i004=
P311 DC Curr Reg Time i001=0.015 i001= i001=
i002=0.015 i002= i002=
i003=0.015 i003= i003=
i004=0.015 i004= i004=
P313 DC Volts Reg Gain i001=3.00 i001= i001=
i002=3.00 i002= i002=
i003=3.00 i003= i003=
i004=3.00 i004= i004=
P314 DC Volts RegTime i001=3.00 i001= i001=
i002=3.00 i002= i002=
i003=3.00 i003= i003=
i004=3.00 i004= i004=
12-2 Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

06.01 Logbook

P316 DC V-Reg +Limit i001=0.01 i001= i001=
i002=0.01 i002= i002=
i003=0.01 i003= i003=
i004=0.01 i004= i004=
P317 DC V-Reg -Limit i001=-1.00 i001= i001=
i002=-1.00 i002= i002=
i003=-1.00 i003= i003=
i004=-1.00 i004= i004=
P318 DC V(set,red) i001=80.00 i001= i001=
i002=80.00 i002= i002=
i003=80.00 i003= i003=
i004=80.00 i004= i004=
P319 DC V(set,red)Hys i001=6.00 i001= i001=
i002=6.00 i002= i002=
i003=6.00 i003= i003=
i004=6.00 i004= i004=
P320 Smooth Load Amps i001=5 i001= i001=
i002=5 i002= i002=
i003=5 i003= i003=
i004=5 i004= i004=
P321 Id thres.(Ud red) i001=30.00 i001= i001=
i002=30.00 i002= i002=
i003=30.00 i003= i003=
i004=30.00 i004= i004=
P322 Id hyst.(Ud red) i001=20.00 i001= i001=
i002=20.00 i002= i002=
i003=20.00 i003= i003=
i004=20.00 i004= i004=
P323 Enab.Ud red (Id) 0
P329 PreChange Time i001=500 i001= i001=
i002=500 i002= i002=
i003=500 i003= i003=
i004=500 i004= i004=
P330 Discharge time i001=2000 i001= i001=
i002=2000 i002= i002=
i003=2000 i003= i003=
i004=2000 i004= i004=
P353 Thyristor Test 0
P354 GroundFault Test 2
P366 Auto Restart 0

Logbook 06.01

P408 Caps FormingTime i001=10.0 i001= i001=
i002=10.0 i002= i002=
i003=10.0 i003= i003=
i004=10.0 i004= i004=
P409 Contactor Delay 0.0
P486 Src Current Setp i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P517 DC Volts Dev Lim i001=2.00 i001= i001=
i002=2.00 i002= i002=
i003=2.00 i003= i003=
i004=2.00 i004= i004=
P518 Deviation Time i001=0.10 i001= i001=
i002=0.10 i002= i002=
i003=0.10 i003= i003=
i004=0.10 i004= i004=
P554 Src ON/OFF1 i001=1010 i001= i001=
i002=1001 i002= i002=
P555 Src1 OFF2 i001=1010 i001= i001=
i002=1002 i002= i002=
P556 Src2 OFF2 i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P557 Src3 OFF2 i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P561 Src InvRelease i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P565 Src1 Fault Reset i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=1003 i002= i002=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i002=2001 i002= i002=
P568 Src Jog1 ON i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P569 Src Jog2 ON i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P571 Src Reduce DC V i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P572 Src RegenRelease i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P573 Src No ExtFault3 i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=

06.01 Logbook

P574 Src Motor/Regen i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P578 Src RDataSetBit0 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P579 Src RDataSetBit1 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P583 Src 12-Pulse Mode i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P587 Src Master/Slave i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P588 Src No Ext Warn1 i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P589 Src No Ext Warn2 i001=1 i001= i001=
i002=1 i002= i002=
P590 Src Base/Reserve 1005
P591 Src ContactorMsg 1
P600 Trg Bit Ready On i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P601 Trg Bit Rdy Oper i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P602 Trg Bit Operat i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P603 Trg Bit Fault i001=1002 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P604 Trg Bit No OFF2 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P606 Trg BitONblocked i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P607 Trg Bit Warning i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P608 Trg Bit Deviat. i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P610 Trg Reren Ready i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P611 Trg Low Voltage i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P612 Trg Bit Contact i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=

Logbook 06.01

P613 Trg DC V reduced i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P614 Trg Motor/Regen i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P618 Trg. Cur.Lim. Active i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P619 Trg Bit Ext Flt1 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P620 Trg Bit Ext Flt2 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P621 Trg Bit ExtWarn i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P622 Trg Bit i2t Inv i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P623 Trg BitFltTmpInv i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P624 Trg BitWarTmpInv i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P631 Trg Bit Charging i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
P655 CUR AnaOutActVal 37
P656 CUR AnaOutGain 10.00
P657 CUR AnaOutOffset 0.00
P658 AO Curr(act)Conf 0
P660 SCI AnalogInConf i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
P661 SCI AnaInSmooth i001=2 i001= i001=
i002=2 i002= i002=
i003=2 i003= i003=
i004=2 i004= i004=
i005=2 i005= i005=
i006=2 i006= i006=
P662 SCI AnalogInOffs i001=0.00 i001= i001=
i002=0.00 i002= i002=
i003=0.00 i003= i003=
i004=0.00 i004= i004=
i005=0.00 i005= i005=
i006=0.00 i006= i006=

06.01 Logbook

P664 SCI AnaOutActVal i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
P665 SCI-AnaOutGain i001=10.00 i001= i001=
i002=10.00 i002= i002=
i003=10.00 i003= i003=
i004=10.00 i004= i004=
i005=10.00 i005= i005=
i006=10.00 i006= i006=
P666 SCI AnaOutOffs i001=0.00 i001= i001=
i002=0.00 i002= i002=
i003=0.00 i003= i003=
i004=0.00 i004= i004=
i005=0.00 i005= i005=
i006=0.00 i006= i006=
P680 Scom1 Act Value i001=968 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
i007=0 i007= i007=
i008=0 i008= i008=
i009=0 i009= i009=
i010=0 i010= i010=
i011=0 i011= i011=
i012=0 i012= i012=
i013=0 i013= i013=
i014=0 i014= i014=
i015=0 i015= i015=
i016=0 i016= i016=
P681 Scom2 Act Value i001=599 i001= i001=
i002=34 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
P682 SCB Protocol 0
P683 SCom/SCB BusAddr i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=

Logbook 06.01

P684 SCom/SCB Baud i001=6 i001= i001=
i002=6 i002= i002=
i003=13 i003= i003=
P685 SCom/SCB #PKWDat i001=127 i001= i001=
i002=127 i002= i002=
P686 SCom/SCB # PrDat i001=2 i001= i001=
i002=2 i002= i002=
i003=2 i003= i003=
P687 SCom/SCB TlgOFF i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=1 i003= i003=
P688 SST2 Protocol 0
P689 SCB Peer2PeerExt i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
P690 SCB Act Values i001=968 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
i007=0 i007= i007=
i008=0 i008= i008=
i009=0 i009= i009=
i010=0 i010= i010=
i011=0 i011= i011=
i012=0 i012= i012=
i013=0 i013= i013=
i014=0 i014= i014=
i015=0 i015= i015=
i016=0 i016= i016=

06.01 Logbook

P694 CB/TB Act Values i001=968 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
i007=0 i007= i007=
i008=0 i008= i008=
i009=0 i009= i009=
i010=0 i010= i010=
i011=0 i011= i011=
i012=0 i012= i012=
i013=0 i013= i013=
i014=0 i014= i014=
i015=0 i015= i015=
i016=0 i016= i016=
P695 CB/TB TlgOFFTime 20
P696 CB Parameter 1 0
P706 CB Parameter 11 i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
r720 Software version 0
P772 Thyr.vlt.corr i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
(only visible if i003=0 i003= i003=
P051=3, P799=4) i004=0 i004= i004=
i005=0 i005= i005=
i006=0 i006= i006=
P773 Deadband Convert i001=0.01 i001= i001=
i002=0.01 i002= i002=
i003=0.01 i003= i003=
i004=0.01 i004= i004=

Logbook 06.01

P774 Deadband Invert i001=-3.00 i001= i001=
i002=-3.00 i002= i002=
i003=-3.00 i003= i003=
i004=-3.00 i004= i004=
P775 Min Gating Angle i001=0 i001= i001=
i002=0 i002= i002=
i003=0 i003= i003=
i004=0 i004= i004=
P776 Max Gating Angle i001=150 i001= i001=
i002=150 i002= i002=
i003=150 i003= i003=
i004=150 i004= i004=
P777 Max Gating Angle i001=20.00 i001= i001=
Ramp i002=20.00 i002= i002=
i003=20.00 i003= i003=
i004=20.00 i004= i004=
P785 I2t Control Word 1
P793 Line Voltage Delay 0.03
P799 Spezial Access 0
P917 Change Reports 0
P918 CB Bus Address 3
P927 Parameter Access 6
P928 Src Base/Reserve 1005
P952 # of Faults 0
P970 Factory Settings 1
P971 EEPROM Storing 0

06.01 Logbook
No. Date/time Name/department Fault and diagnostic Measures

messages

Logbook 06.01
No. Date/time Name/department Fault and diagnostic Measures

messages

06.01 Environmental Compatibility
13 Environmental Compatibility
Environmental aspects during development
The number of parts has been reduced substantially by the use of highly integrated components and by a
modular structure of the complete converter series. This reduces energy consumption during production.
Particular attention was paid to reducing volume, mass and type diversity of the metal and plastic parts.
Plastic parts used: ABS: PMU support
PP: Insulating plate

Bus retrofit
PC: Protection against accidental contact
PA6: Insulating films

Terminal housing
Flame arresters containing halogen and insulating materials containing silicone have been replaced by pollutant-
free materials in all components.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterion in the selection of externally source items.
Environmental aspects during production
Externally sourced items are mainly transported in returnable packaging. The packaging material itself is
recyclable, consisting mainly of cardboard and untreated wood.
With the exception of galvanized housings and tinned rails, surface coatings have not been applied.
SMD components are used on the printed-circuit boards.
Production is emission-free.
Environmental aspects of disposal
The unit can be dismantled into recyclable mechanical components by means of easily removable screw and
snap joints.
The PC boards can be disposed of thermally. The number of components containing hazardous substances is
only slight.
The recyclable plastic parts are designated in accordance with DIN 54840 and marked with the recycling symbol.

Environmental Compatibility 06.01

06.01 Technical Data
14 Technical Data
In the event of conditions of use other than those listed in this chapter, please contact your local Siemens branch
or national subsidiary.
Coolant temperature 0 °C to +40 °C

Storage temperature − 25 °C to +70 °C
Transport temperature − 25 °C to +70 °C
Environmental class 3K3 DIN IEC 721-3-3 / 04.90
Soiling 2 DIN VDE 0110 Part 1 / 01.89
moisture not permitted
Overvoltage category (power section) III DIN VDE 0110 Part 2 / 01.89
Overvoltage resistance class 1 DIN VDE 0160 / 04.91
(with converter connected)
Type of protection IP00 DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 / 11.92 =
^ EN 60529
Interference immunity IEC 801-2, IEC 801-4
Mechanical strength DIN IEC 68-2-6 / 06.90
Frequency range Constant amplitude of
deflection acceleration
Hz mm m/s2 (g)
10 to 58 0,075
− stationary use
mor than 58 to 500 9,8 (1)
3,5
− during transport
9,8 (1)
The units can also be operated in load class II. The permissible values must be taken from the following tables.
I
(A)
Load class ΙΙ
136%
Load class Ι
100%
91%
60s 240s t/(s)
Figure 14.1 Power output according to load class II

Technical Data 06.01
Common 6SE70..-.....-0AA0 38-2EH85 41-0EH85 41-3EK85 41-8EK85

Rectifier
Rated voltage, rated frequency, rated current
Rated voltage V
Input Un 3 AC 380V –15% to 480V +10%
Output Udn DC 510V –15% to 650V +10%
Rated frequency fn
Input Hz 46 to 64 (automatic frequency matching)
Output D.C.
Rated current In A
Input (rms value) AC 710 888 1156 1542
Output (average) DC 821 1023 1333 1780
Load class II acc. EN 60146-1-1
Rated output current average A 747 931 1213 1620
Base load duration s 240
Excess output current A 1121 1396 1820 2430
average
Excess current duration s 60
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor 1
Mains cosϕ1N
Power dissipation kW 3,29 3,70 4,85 6,24
− Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0,55 0,55 1,0 1,0
Sound pressure level, dimensions, weight
Sound pressure 50Hz dB(A) 80 80 82 82
level of fan 60Hz 83 83 82 82
Size H H K K
Width mm 508 508 800 800
Height mm 1050 1050 1400 1400
Depth mm 551 551 550 550
Weight app. kg 130 130 260 300
“Parallel units” (-0AD0) of size K for connecting in parallel have the same technical data as the corresponding
"basic units" (-0AA0). Please note the unit correspondence and notes of Section 3.7!
The permissible output current in parallel mode is reduced (due to current division between the power sections)
by 10 % as compared to the sum of the rated currents of the separate power sections.

Common 6SE70..-.....-0AA0 37-7FH85 41-0FH85 41-3FK85 41-5FK85 41-8FK85

Rectifier
Rated voltage V
Input Un 3 AC 500V –15% to 600V +10%
Output Udn DC 675V –15% to 810V +10%
Rated frequency fn
Output D.C.
Rated current In A
Input (rms value) AC 671 888 1119 1269 1633
Output (average) DC 774 1023 1285 1464 1880
Rated output current average A 704 931 1169 1332 1711
Excess output current A 1057 1396 1754 1998 2566
average
Power factor 1
Mains cosϕ1N
Power dissipation kW 3,30 4,03 5,40 5,87 6,65
− Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0,55 0,55 1,0 1,0 1,0
Sound pressure 50Hz dB(A) 80 80 82 82 82
level of fan 60Hz 83 83 82 82 82
Size H H K K K
Width mm 508 508 800 800 800
Height mm 1050 1050 1400 1400 1400
Depth mm 551 551 550 550 550
Weight app. kg 130 130 260 260 300

Common 6SE70..-.....-0AA0 37-7HH85 41-0HH85 41-3HK85 41-5HK85 41-8HK85

Rectifier
Rated voltage V
Input Un 3 AC 660 to 690V ±15 %
Output Udn DC 890 to 930V ±15 %
Rated frequency fn
Output D.C.
Rated current In A
Input (rms value) AC 671 888 1119 1269 1633
Output (average) DC 774 1023 1285 1464 1880
Rated output current average A 704 931 1169 1332 1711
Excess output current A 1057 1396 1754 1998 2566
average
Power factor 1
Mains cosϕ1N
Power dissipation kW 3,70 4,15 5,54 5,97 7,62
− Maximum
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0,55 0,55 1,0 1,0 1,0
Sound pressure 50Hz dB(A) 80 80 82 82 82
level of fan 60Hz 83 83 82 82 82
Size H H K K K
Width mm 508 508 800 800 800
Height mm 1050 1050 1400 1400 1400
Depth mm 551 551 550 550 550
Weight app. kg 130 130 260 260 300

14.1 Power reduction at increased coolant temperature

The rated current must be reduced according to Figure 14.2 for cooling medium temperatures exceeding 40°C.
Cooling medium temperatures > 50°C are not permissible.
permissible rated current

in %
100
90
80
75
70
60 Coolant temperature
in °C
10 20 30 40 50
Figure 14.2 Maximum permitted rated current depending on coolant temperature
14.2 Power reduction at altitudes > 1000m above MSL

The rated current must be reduced as shown in Figure 14.3 in the event of installation altitudes > 1000 m above
mean sea level. Installation altitudes > 2000 m above MSL (please enquire).
permissible rated current permissible rated voltage

in % in %
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000

Installation altitude Installation altitude
in m above sea level in m above sea level
Figure 14.3 Maximum values for rated current and rated voltage depending on installation altitude

14.3 Applied standards

DIN VDE 0100 Erection of power installations with rated voltages up to 1000 V,
Part 540 A11.91 Selection and erection of electrical equipment, earthing, PE conductor,
equipotential bonding conductor
DIN VDE 0106 Protection against electric shock:

Part 1 A05.82 Classification of electrical and electronic equipment (IEC 536)
Part 100 A03.83 Arrangement of actuation elements in the proximity of shock-hazard parts
DIN VDE 0110 Part 1 and 2 Isolation coordination for electrical equipment in low-voltage installations
A01.89
DIN VDE 0113 Safety of machines: electrical equipment of machines,

Part 1 A06.93 General requirements (EN 60204-1:1992)
DIN VDE 0160 E04.91 Equipping power installations with electronic equipment
DIN VDE 0298 Use of cables and insulated cables for power installations:
Part 2 A11.79 Recommended values for the current carrying capacity of cables with rated
voltages U0 / U to 18/30 kV
Part 4 A02.80 Recommended values for the current carrying capacity of cables
DIN VDE 0470 Part 1 A12.92 Types of protection, shock, foreign body and water protection for electrical
equipment (EN 60529: 1991)
DIN VDE 0558 Part1 A07.87 Semiconductor converters: general regulations and special regulations for
line-commutated converters
DIN VDE 0843 Electromagnetic compatibility of instrumentation and control equipment in

industrial process engineering:
Part 2 A09.87 Z Interference resistance to static electricity discharges; requirements and
measurement methods (IEC801-2) Ersetzt durch DIN EN 60801, Teil 2
(09.87)
DIN VDE 0875 RFI suppression of electrical equipment and installations:

Part 11 A12.88 Z (EN 55014: 1987) Ersetzt durch DIN VDE 0875, Teil 14 und DIN VDE 0075
Part 1 A07.92 (EN 55011: 1991)
DIN 41494 Part 5 A9.80 Equipment practice for electronic facilities; subracks and modules
DIN 41651 Part 1 A9.89 Connectors for printed circuits for connecting ribbon cables with round
conductors; indirect insertion, grid dimension 2.54 mm
DIN IEC 68 Part 2 Elektrotechnik; Grundlegende Umweltprüfverfahren; Prüfungen
DIN IEC 721 Electrical engineering; classification of environmental conditions:

Part 3 A08.87 classes of influencing quantities
IEC 801 Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial - process measurement and

control equipment
Part 4 Electrical fast transient / burst requirements
EN 60146-1-1: 1993 Semiconductor converters;

General requirements and line-commutated converters:
Part 1-1 Definition of basic requirements (IEC146-1-1991)

Sources:
DIN standards and foreign standards: Beuth-Verlag GmbH
Burggrafenstraße 6
10787 Berlin
DIN VDE regulations: VDE-Auslieferungsstelle

Merianstraße 29
63069 Offenbach


SIMOVIS
ENGLISH
Disk 1+2
SIMOVIS
DEUTSCH
Disk 1+2
06.01
Bisher sind folgende Ausgaben erschienen: Ausgabe Sachnummer

The following versions have appeared so far: Version Part number
A C98130-A1235-A3-01-47
B C98130-A1235-A3-02-47
C C98130-A1235-A3-03-7447
D C98130-A1235-A3-04-7447
E C98130-A1235-A3-05-7447
F C98130-A1235-A3-06-7447
Ausgabe F besteht aus folgenden Kapiteln

Version F consists of the following chapters
Kapitel Seiten Chapter Pages Ausgabedatum

Date of Edition
0 Allgemeines 12 0 General 12 06.01
1 Beschreibung 2 1 Description 2 06.01
2 Transportieren, Auspacken, 4 2 Transport, unpacking, 4 06.01
Montieren assembly
3 Anschließen 30 3 Connection 30 06.01
4 Inbetriebsetzen 74 4 Start-Up 74 06.01
5 Parameterliste 42 5 Parameter List 42 06.01
6 Bedienen 4 6 Operator control 4 06.01
7 Störungen und Warnungen 12 7 Fault and Alarm Messages 10 06.01
8 Wartung 10 8 Maintenance 10 06.01
9 Optionen 8 9 Options 8 06.01
10 Ersatzteile 4 10 Spare parts 4 06.01
11 Leerkapitel — 11 Blank — —
12 Logbuch 12 12 Logbook 12 06.01
13 Umweltverträglichkeit 2 13 Environmental compatibility 2 06.01
14 Technische Daten 8 14 Technical data 8 06.01
Siemens AG © Siemens AG, 1994

Elektronikwerk Wien Änderungen vorbehalten
Postfach 83, A-1211 Wien Subject to change without notice
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

Printed in Austria

Masterdrives Manual Retificador (Ing) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Masterdrives Manual Retificador (Ing) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

s

Ausgabe / Edition: F Bestell-Nr. / Order-No.: 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

These Operating Instructions are available in the following languages:

Language French Spanish Italian

Converter software version:

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or contents is

© Siemens AG 1994 All rights reserved

0 Definitions .................................................................................................................. 0-9

1 Description ................................................................................................................. 1-1

2 Transport, Unpacking and Assembly ............................................................. 2-1

3 Connection ................................................................................................................. 3-1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 ENGLISH 0-3

4 Start-Up ........................................................................................................................... 4-1

0-4 ENGLISH Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

4.3.9.7 Circuit identification (P052 = 21) ................................................................................... 4-41

5 Parameter List .......................................................................................................... 5-1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 ENGLISH 0-5

6 Operator Control ...................................................................................................... 6-1

7 Fault and Alarm Messages .................................................................................. 7-1

8 Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 8-1

9 Options ........................................................................................................................ 9-1

10 Spare Parts ................................................................................................................ 10-1

12 Logbook ...................................................................................................................... 12-1

13 Environmental Compatibility .............................................................................. 13-1

0-6 ENGLISH Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

14 Technical Data .......................................................................................................... 14-1

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 ENGLISH 0-7

0-8 ENGLISH Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 ENGLISH 0-9

Sitting position Standing position Standing / Sitting position

0-10 ENGLISH Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 ENGLISH 0-11

0-12 ENGLISH Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

1.2 Principle of operation

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 ENGLISH 1-1

1-2 ENGLISH Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

2 Transport, Unpacking and Assembly

2.1 Transport and unpacking

The following are required for securing size K:

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 ENGLISH 2-1

Requirements for the installation site:

Figure 2.1 Installation in control cabinets

2-2 ENGLISH Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

Mounting holes for wall mounting 508 285

C/L+ D/L- D/L- C/L+ 1) Mounting hole for M12 screw

Common Rectifier Operating Instructions

PE1 and main contactor

Level B Level A When the units are installed in cabinets,it must

U1 V1 W1 C D 1) Mounting hole for M12 screw

Figure 2.3 Dimension drawing, size K

6a) Tighten screws again.

When the units are installed in cabinets,it

1) No displacement of the centre of gravity

Common Rectifier Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 ENGLISH 3-1

3.1 Power connections

(DC output) (DC output)

3-2 ENGLISH Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0

Function Terminal Connected load / Description

Terminal X19 fused with fuse (F3 and F4):

Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0 ENGLISH 3-3

Unit Order No. Rated input Mains DC link Protective

3-4 ENGLISH Siemens AG 6SE7087-6AK85-0AA0